Professional Documents
Culture Documents
80-31-760-ASL-5000-Users-Manualpv1-1 3.6 PDF
80-31-760-ASL-5000-Users-Manualpv1-1 3.6 PDF
USA
Toll
Free:
1
(800)
583-‐9910
|
International:
+1
(412)
441-‐8228
|
service@ingmarmed.com
This
page
intentionally
left
blank
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
2
LEGAL
INFORMATION
Product
Warranty
Educational
tools
and
test
instruments
manufactured
or
distributed
by
IngMar
Medical
come
with
a
limited
warranty,
covering
materials
and
workmanship,
for
a
period
of
one
year
from
the
date
of
shipment,
except
for
products
with
stated
warranties
other
than
one
year.
Software,
fuses
and
batteries
are
excluded
from
this
warranty.
System
components
such
as
computers
are
supplied
with
the
factory
warranty
of
the
original
manufacturer.
IngMar
Medical
reserves
the
right
to
perform
warranty
service(s)
at
its
factory,
at
an
authorized
repair
center,
or
at
the
customer's
installation.
IngMar
Medical's
obligations
under
this
warranty
are
limited
to
repairs,
or
at
IngMar
Medical's
option,
replacement
of
any
defective
parts
of
the
purchased
equipment,
without
charge,
if
said
defects
occur
during
normal
service.
Claims
for
damages
during
shipment
must
be
filed
promptly
with
the
transportation
company.
All
correspondence
concerning
the
equipment
must
specify
both
the
model
name
and
number,
and
the
serial
number
as
it
appears
on
the
equipment.
Improper
use,
mishandling,
tampering
with,
or
operation
of
the
equipment
without
following
specific
operating
instructions
will
void
this
warranty
and
release
IngMar
Medical
from
any
further
warranty
obligations.
The
above
is
the
sole
warranty
provided
by
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
No
other
warranty,
expressed
or
implied,
is
intended.
Representatives
of
IngMar
Medical
are
not
authorized
to
modify
the
terms
of
this
warranty.
For
factory
repair
service,
call:
Toll
free:
1
(800)
583-‐9910
International:
+1
(412)
441-‐8228
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Facsimile:
+1
(412)
441-‐8404
Or
contact
us
via
e-‐mail
at:
service@ingmarmed.com
Our
shipping
address:
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
5940
Baum
Blvd
Pittsburgh,
PA
15206
USA
Please
note
that
a
valid
service
repair
order
(SRO)
no.
is
always
required
before
sending
in
any
products
for
repair,
calibrations,
or
updates.
Windows®,
MS-‐DOS®,
and
Excel®
are
registered
trademarks
of
Microsoft
Corporation.
LabVIEW™
is
a
trademark
of
National
Instruments
Corporation.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
All
other
trademarks
or
registered
trademarks
are
property
of
their
respective
owners.
Copyright
©
1998
-‐
2016,
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
No
parts
of
this
document
may
be
reproduced,
stored
in
a
retrieval
system,
translated,
transcribed,
or
transmitted,
in
any
form,
or
by
any
means,
without
identifying
its
authorship
as
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
4
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
i)
You
may
permanently
and
simultaneously
transfer
all
of
the
Software,
Documentation
and
the
License
if:
a)
you
deliver
to
the
transferee
the
Software
and
Documentation
(including
updates
and
upgrades)
supplied
by
this
Agreement;
b)
notify
IngMar
in
writing
of
such
transfer;
and
c)
destroy
any
archival/backup
copy.
A
transfer
immediately
terminates
the
License.
You
agree
that
the
transferee
must
expressly
accept
all
terms
and
conditions
of
this
Agreement.
3.
YOU
MAY
NOT
COPY
THE
SOFTWARE
OR
DOCUMENTATION;
provided,
however,
that
you
may
make
one
(1)
copy
of
the
Software
for
archival/backup
purposes.
4.
If
either
the
Software
or
Documentation
is
used
in
any
way
not
expressly
and
specifically
permitted
by
this
License,
then
the
License
shall
immediately
terminate.
Upon
the
termination
of
the
License,
you
shall
thereafter
make
no
further
use
of
the
Software
or
Documentation,
and
you
shall
return
to
IngMar
all
licensed
materials,
postage
prepaid.
5.
THE
SOFTWARE
IS
NOT
INTENDED
TO
BE
USED
FOR
ACTUAL
ANALYSIS
AND
DIAGNOSIS
OF
MEDICAL
CONDITIONS
OF
HUMANS
OR
ANIMALS.
WARRANTIES
1.
LIMITED
WARRANTY
ON
MEDIA.
For
a
period
of
thirty
(30)
days
following
the
date
of
delivery
to
you
as
the
original
licensee,
if
evidenced
by
your
receipt
as
such,
(the
“Warranty
Period“)
IngMar
warrants
the
flash
memory
device
on
which
the
Software
is
embodied
(if
Software
was
delivered
to
you
on
a
USB
flash
drive)
to
be
free
from
defects
in
materials
and
workmanship
under
normal
use.
The
warranty
is
personal
to
you,
and
no
warranty
is
made
to
your
transferees.
THE
FOREGOING
WARRANTIES
ARE
THE
SOLE
WARRANTIES
ON
THE
MEDIA
AND
ARE
IN
LIEU
OF
ALL
WARRANTIES
OF
ANY
KIND,
SUCH
AS
WARRANTIES
OF
MERCHANTABILITY
OR
FITNESS
FOR
ANY
PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
2.
NO
WARRANTY
ON
SOFTWARE
OR
DOCUMENTATION.
INGMAR
LICENSES
THE
SOFTWARE
AND
DOCUMENTATION
SOLELY
ON
AN
“AS
IS”
BASIS
WITHOUT
WARRANTIES
OF
ANY
KIND,
SUCH
AS
WARRANTIES
OF
MERCHANTABILITY
OR
FITNESS
FOR
ANY
PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
THE
ENTIRE
RISK
OF
QUALITY
AND
PERFORMANCE
IS
WITH
YOU.
IF
EITHER
THE
SOFTWARE,
DOCUMENTATION
OR
BOTH
PROVE
TO
BE
DEFECTIVE,
YOU
ASSUME
THE
ENTIRE
COST
OF
ALL
SERVICING,
CORRECTION
OR
REPAIR.
REMEDY
FOR
DEFECTIVE
MEDIA
Your
sole
and
exclusive
remedy
in
the
event
of
a
defect
in
a
warranted
item
is
expressly
limited
to
replacement
of
the
defective
media.
To
receive
a
replacement
USB
flash
drive,
you
must
send
the
defective
flash
device,
with
proof
of
purchase,
to
IngMar
at
the
address
indicated
below,
postage
pre-‐paid
and
postmarked
within
the
Warranty
Period.
IN
NO
EVENT
SHALL
INGMAR
BE
LIABLE
FOR
ANY
OTHER
OBLIGATIONS
OR
LIABILITIES
INCLUDING,
WITHOUT
LIMITATION,
LIABILITY
FOR
DAMAGES
(WHETHER
GENERAL
OR
SPECIAL,
DIRECT
OR
INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL,
INCIDENTAL,
EXEMPLARY),
OR
FOR
ANY
CLAIM
FOR
THE
LOSS
OF
PROFITS,
BUSINESS
OR
INFORMATION,
OR
DAMAGE
TO
GOOD
WILL
EVEN
IF
INGMAR
HAS
BEEN
ADVISED
OF
THE
POSSIBILITY
OF
SUCH
DAMAGES.
IN
ANY
EVENT,
INGMAR'S
MAXIMUM
LIABILITY
SHALL
BE
LIMITED
TO
THE
AMOUNT
OF
THE
PURCHASE
PRICE.
U.S.
GOVERNMENT
RESTRICTED
RIGHTS
LEGEND
The
Software
and
Documentation
have
been
developed
exclusively
at
private
expense,
and
are
provided
with
RESTRICTED
RIGHTS.
Use,
duplication
or
disclosure
by
the
Government
is
subject
to
restrictions
as
set
forth
in
subparagraph
(c)
of
the
Rights
in
Technical
Data
and
Computer
Software
clause
at
DFARS
252.227-‐7013
or
subparagraphs
(c)
(1)
and
(2)
of
the
Commercial
Computer
Software-‐Restricted
Rights
at
48
CFR
52.227-‐19,
as
applicable.
IngMar
is
the
Contractor,
and
is
located
at
5940
Baum
Blvd,
Pittsburgh,
PA
15206.
EXPORT
RESTRICTIONS
The
program
or
underlying
information
or
technology
may
not
be
installed
or
otherwise
exported
or
re-‐exported
where
prohibited
by
law.
MISCELLANEOUS
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
This
Agreement
shall
be
considered
severable,
and
if
for
any
reason
any
term
or
condition
is
determined
to
be
invalid,
illegal
or
unenforceable
under
current
or
future
law,
such
invalidity
shall
not
impair
the
operation
of,
or
otherwise
effect,
the
valid
terms
and
conditions
of
this
Agreement,
so
long
as
the
intent
of
this
Agreement
is
maintained.
This
Agreement
shall
be
governed
by,
construed
and
enforced
in
accordance
with
the
laws
of
the
Commonwealth
of
Pennsylvania,
with
the
exception
of
its
conflict
of
law
provisions.
The
parties
consent
to
the
personal
jurisdiction
of
the
Commonwealth
of
Pennsylvania
and
agree
that
any
legal
proceedings
arising
out
of
this
Agreement
shall
be
conducted
solely
in
such
Commonwealth.
No
action,
regardless
of
form,
arising
out
of
this
Agreement
may
be
brought
by
either
party
more
than
one
(1)
year
after
a
claim
has
accrued.
FreeDOS
License
The
FreeDOS
operating
system
running
on
the
ASL
5000
CPU
is
distributed
in
accordance
with
the
provisions
of
the
GNU
GPL
(General
Public
License)
granted
by
the
FreeDOS
Project
(www.freedos.org).
6
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
6
Understanding
The
Patient
Modeling
Process
.............................................................
35
6.1
STRUCTURE
OF
AN
ASL
5000
PATIENT
MODEL
....................................................................
35
6.1.1
True
Patient
Models
...............................................................................................................
35
6.1.2
Smart
Pump
Models
...............................................................................................................
36
6.2
PATIENT
MODEL
LIBRARY
...............................................................................................
37
6.3
SCRIPTED
MODELING
.....................................................................................................
38
6.4
INTERACTIVE
MODELING
................................................................................................
39
6.5
QUICKCHOICE
MODELING
IN
THE
RESPISIM®
ENVIRONMENT
...................................................
39
6.6
RESPISIM®
PATIENT
MODELS
IN
CURRICULUM
TEACHING
MODULES
.........................................
40
7
Features
and
Functions
of
the
Standard
User
Environment
.........................................
41
7.1
RUN
TIME
HOME
.........................................................................................................
41
7.2
INTERACTIVE
SIMULATIONS
.............................................................................................
47
7.2.1
Lung
Model
Parameters
Tab
..................................................................................................
49
7.2.2
Spontaneous
Breathing
Parameters
Tab
................................................................................
50
9.1
CONCEPT
OF
RESPISIM
.................................................................................................
107
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
8
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
11.1.2.1
Technical
Trigger
Effort
Model
....................................................................................................................
178
11.1.2.2
Sinusoidal
Patient
Effort
..............................................................................................................................
178
11.1.2.3
File-‐Based
Patient
Effort
..............................................................................................................................
182
11.1.2.4
Patient
Effort
from
Analog
Input
.................................................................................................................
183
11.1.2.5
SmartPump™
Mode
....................................................................................................................................
184
11.2
ASL
5000
SOFTWARE
UTILITIES
.....................................................................................
187
11.2.1
Exporting
Data
Files
..............................................................................................................
187
11.2.1.1
AUX
Channel
Output
Resampling
................................................................................................................
189
11.2.1.2
RespiSim®
File
Conversion
...........................................................................................................................
191
11.2.1.3
Processing
Patient
Flow
Recordings
............................................................................................................
191
11.2.1.4
Pressure/Flow
Profile
Resampling
...............................................................................................................
194
11.2.1.5
TCP
Breath
Parameter
Broadcast
................................................................................................................
196
11.2.1.6
TCP
Waveform
Broadcast
............................................................................................................................
197
11.2.1.7
TCP
Broadcast
Configuration
.......................................................................................................................
198
11.3
ANALOG
INPUTS
AND
OUTPUTS
.....................................................................................
199
11.3.1
Analog
Output
Configuration
...............................................................................................
200
11.4
DIGITAL
OUTPUTS
......................................................................................................
202
13.1
AN
INTRODUCTION
TO
VENTILATORY
MECHANICS
...............................................................
236
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
10
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Indicates
a
condition
that
may
lead
to
equipment
damage
or
malfunction
NOTE
Indicates
points
of
particular
interest
or
emphasis
for
more
efficient
or
convenient
operation.
New
Feature
Significant
new
features
introduced
with
software
3.6
will
be
indicated
in
this
way.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
2 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
12
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
13
Do
not
allow
aerosols
to
contaminate
the
cylinder
of
the
ASL
5000.
Contamination
with
aerosols
may
result
in
equipment
malfunction.
For
applications
requiring
the
“inhalation”
of
substances,
always
use
accessory
31
00
600,
the
Auxiliary
Gas
Exchange
Cylinder
(“AGEC”).
WARNING!
Use
of
the
ASL
5000
in
the
presence
of
flammable
anesthetics
may
present
an
explosion
hazard.
2.1.3 RespiSim®
Option
Use
of
RespiSim®
with
the
ASL
5000
provides
a
fully
integrated
respiratory
simulation
experience
for
training
students
in
the
subjects
of
mechanical
ventilation
and
ventilator
management.
With
RespiSim®,
as
an
educator,
you
can:
1. Capture
data
from
a
real
ventilator
as
well
as
from
the
ASL
5000
Breathing
Simulator.
2. Mark
and
annotate
events
as
well
as
display
vital
signs
of
the
patient
on
a
separate
monitor.
3. Replay
simulation
recordings
for
debriefing
sessions
or
use
them
during
classroom
instruction.
RespiSim®
brings
the
advantages
of
medical
simulation
(accelerated,
immersive
learning,
training
with
“permission
to
fail”)
to
respiratory
care
education.
Preconfigured
Curriculum
Modules
form
an
integral
part
of
this
new
method
of
instruction.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
WARNING!
NOT
FOR
USE
ON
A
PATIENT
–
The
ventilator
data
acquisition
and
storage
system
of
RespiSim®
is
not
intended
to
monitor,
chart,
or
store
data
coming
from
real
patients
or
for
the
purpose
of
assisting
in
clinical
decisions
regarding
real
patients
WARNING!
Electromagnetic
Interference:
Do
not
use
the
ASL
5000
in
patient
rooms
or
other
areas
where
life
supporting
equipment
is
in
use.
14
Electrical
Supply:
Connect
ASL
5000
only
to
a
properly
grounded
wall
outlet
providing
100
–
240
V
AC,
50
–
60
Hz.
WARNING!
Electric
Shock
Hazard:
Always
disconnect
from
line
power
before
opening
ASL
5000.
CAUTION!
Do
not
operate
ASL
5000
when
it
is
wet
due
to
spills
or
condensation.
Never
sterilize
or
immerse
the
device
in
liquids.
CAUTION!
Always
use
dry
air
or
oxygen
with
the
ASL
5000.
“Rainout”
inside
the
cylinder
may
impair
its
function
and
may
eventually
damage
the
simulator.
Please
contact
IngMar
Medical
for
the
necessary
procedures
if
operation
with
humidified
gas
is
intended
(requires
heater
–
CTC
option
or
filter).
CAUTION!
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Do
not
operate
the
ASL
5000
if
it
appears
to
have
been
dropped
or
damaged.
WARNING!
Fire
Hazards
related
to
the
use
of
oxygen:
When
using
the
ASL
5000
with
elevated
concentrations
of
oxygen
(ventilators
set
to
FiO2
>
21%),
observe
all
precautions
applicable
to
the
use
of
oxygen
indoors.
• Always
use
extreme
caution
when
using
oxygen!
• Oxygen
intensely
supports
any
burning!
No
smoking,
no
open
fire
in
areas
where
oxygen
is
in
use!
• Always
provide
adequate
ventilation
in
order
to
maintain
ambient
O2
concentrations
<
24
%.
• Always
secure
O2
cylinders
against
tipping,
do
not
expose
to
extreme
heat.
• Do
not
use
oil
or
grease
on
O2
equipment
such
as
tank
valves
or
pressure
regulators.
Do
not
touch
with
oily
hands.
Risk
of
fire!
• Open
and
close
valves
slowly,
with
smooth
turns.
Do
not
use
any
tools.
15
The
ASL
5000
device
is
based
on
a
piston
moving
inside
a
cylinder
and
is
computer-‐controlled
to
accomplish
motion
based
on
the
equation
for
gas
exchange
in
a
ventilated
and/or
spontaneously
breathing
patient.
This
Equation
of
Motion
includes
patient
effort,
which
can
be
freely
programmed.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
3-‐1
Functional
Overview
The
firmware
in
the
device
communicates
with
a
standard
PC
containing
the
installed
host
software,
via
a
serial
(USB)
or
Ethernet
connection.
The
ASL
5000
host
software
version
that
this
manual
refers
to,
is
version
3.6.
Please
refer
to
section
13.3,
How
It
Works,
page
257
to
learn
more.
16
Figure
3-‐2
Standard
Windows
Manager
tabs
• The
RespiSim®
Window
Manager:
With
the
purchase
of
educational
packages
(Essential,
Plus,
or
Pro
Package)
the
standard
interface
(Standard
Window
Manager)
of
the
software
is
replaced
by
the
RespiSim®
Window
Manager,
optimized
and
designed
especially
for
the
educators.
Figure
3-‐3
RespiSim®
Window
Manager
tabs
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
All
necessary
software
components
as
well
as
pdf-‐files
of
support
documents
(including
this
User’s
Manual)
are
pre-‐installed
on
the
PC
that
comes
as
part
of
your
ASL
5000
purchase.
For
manual
installation
of
the
software
on
the
PC,
please
refer
to
section
Manual
Software
Installation
/
Software
Upgrade,
page
272.
• The
Application
Programming
Interface
(API):
For
users
who
want
to
integrate
the
ASL
5000
into
an
R&D
or
QC
test
environment,
IngMar
Medical
has
developed
an
application
programming
interface
(API)
the
allows
remote
control
of
the
simulator
from
any
customer-‐developed
software
(see
Test
Automation
Interface,
page
203).
17
scenario
simulation.
• Full
Simulation
Control:
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
You
control
simulations
either
in
real
time
(Interactive
Control),
from
a
Script,
or
using
the
optional
RespiSim®
educational
interface
(scenario-‐driven
patient
models),
or
using
the
application
programming
interface
(API)
for
remote
control
of
the
simulator
(Test
Automation
Interface,
TAI)
The
Hardware
Expansion
options
include:
• Simulator
Bypass
and
Leak
Valve
Module
(SBLVM)
that
serves
two
functions:
For
one,
you
can
bypass
the
ASL
5000
while
no
simulation
is
running
and
engage
a
separate
test
lung.
In
this
way,
nuisance
alarms
from
connected
ventilators
are
avoided.
In
addition,
you
can
use
its
manual
setting
option
to
manually
set
airway
leaks
at
three
levels.
• Fast
Oxygen
Measurement
(FOM)
option,
based
on
a
paramagnetic
oxygen
sensor,
for
breath-‐
by-‐breath
oxygen
analysis.
• Cylinder
Temperature
Controller
for
regulating
the
temperature
of
the
simulator
cylinder
walls
for
calibration-‐type
measurements
or
to
avoid
rainout
from
humidified
breathing
gas.
18
• Auxiliary
Gas
Exchange
Cylinder,
a
bag-‐in-‐bottle
style
external
accessory
for
protecting
the
simulator
from
aggressive
aerosols
or
anesthetic
agents
as
well
as
from
water
in
humidified
gas.
• Oxygen
Saturation
(SpO2)
Simulation
option—using
the
OxSim,
third-‐party
device—that
generates
optical
signals,
corresponding
to
the
level
of
oxygen
saturation
in
the
patient
model,
to
be
fed
into
an
SpO2
monitor
or
ventilator.
• RespiPatient®,
a
respiratory
torso
manikin
with
bilateral
chest
rise
and
anatomically
correct
airway
and
chest
structure.
Using
the
RespiPatient®,
you
can
also
perform
the
needle
decompression
(pneumothorax),
chest
tube
insertion,
and
cricothyrotomy
and
tracheotomy
training
procedures
as
well
as
generate
realistic
CO2
waveforms
with
the
optional
CO2-‐Box
accessory.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
19
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
4-‐1:
ASL
5000
Line
Power
Connection
CAUTION!
Electrical
Supply:
Connect
ASL
5000
only
to
a
properly
grounded
wall
outlet
providing
100
-‐
240
V
AC,
50
-‐
60
Hz.
20
WARNING!
Electric
Shock
Hazard:
Always
disconnect
from
line
power
before
opening
ASL
5000.
• Configuring
the
Ethernet:
Using
the
supplied
(purple)
Ethernet
cable,
connect
the
Ethernet
port
of
the
ASL
5000
to
any
one
of
the
ports
labeled
1
through
4
on
the
supplied
router.
NOTE
Only
use
ports
1…4
on
the
router
for
this,
do
NOT
use
the
yellow
port
labeled
“Internet.”
For
a
fully
wired
Ethernet
configuration
(recommended):
Using
the
second
supplied
(purple)
Ethernet
cable,
connect
the
Ethernet
port
of
the
PC
to
one
of
the
ports
labeled
1
through
4
on
the
supplied
router.
NOTE
Only
use
ports
1…4
on
the
router
for
this,
do
NOT
use
the
yellow
port
labeled
“Internet.”
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
4-‐2:
Ethernet
Connection
between
ASL
5000
and
PC
Or,
go
wireless
If
you
prefer
a
wireless
connection
between
the
router
and
the
PC,
you
may
omit
the
second
step
(connecting
using
the
Ethernet
cable).
The
PC
is
pre-‐configured
to
make
an
automatic
WiFi
connection
to
the
router,
and
thus
to
the
ASL
5000.
For
special
configurations,
for
example
connecting
to
a
facility-‐wide
intranet
that
requires
fixed
IP
addresses,
please
refer
to
section
15.1,
Issuing
a
Fixed
IP
Address,
page
271.
21
USB
Serial
Connection
Alternatively,
the
ASL
5000
can
also
use
a
USB
serial
connection,
omitting
the
Ethernet
router.
For
this
option:
• Using
the
supplied
USB
cable
connect
the
USB
port
of
the
ASL
5000
directly
to
one
of
the
USB
ports
of
the
PC.
Figure
4-‐3:
USB
Connection
between
ASL
5000
and
PC
NOTE
For
best
results,
we
recommend
using
the
fully
wired
Ethernet
configuration,
since
it
provides
the
most
stable
data
exchange
between
ASL
5000
and
the
PC.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
22
5
RUNNING
A
SIMULATION
After
safely
making
the
electrical
connections
and
setting
up
the
ASL
5000,
you
are
now
ready
to
run
your
first
simulation.
To
begin,
turn
on
the
system:
1. Flip
the
green
power
switch
at
the
back
of
the
ASL
5000
to
the
ON
position;
it
will
light
up.
The
blue
LED
of
the
IngMar
logo
on
the
front
panel
of
the
ASL
5000
will
also
light
up,
indicating
that
the
device
is
now
on.
Figure
5-‐1:
Turning
On
the
Device
2. Observe
the
red
light
of
the
switch
on
the
front
panel.
The
red
light
should
turn
off
after
approximately
20
seconds,
indicating
that
the
device
has
completed
the
boot
process.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
NOTE
Please
note
that
the
red
light
is
an
emergency
OFF
switch
for
disabling
the
piston
drive
in
the
ASL
5000.
2. If
the
red
light
does
not
go
off
after
20
seconds,
depress
the
switch
to
enable
the
drive.
3. Turn
on
your
PC.
4. Double-‐click
the
ASL
SW
3.6
icon
on
the
desktop
to
launch
the
ASL
5000
Welcome
window.
Figure
5-‐2:
ASL
SW
3.6
Icon
23
The
ASL
5000
Welcome
window
is
displayed
(with
the
slider
in
the
Full
System
Mode
default
position).
A
message
will
remind
the
user
to
ensure
that
proper
settings
are
in
place
to
connect
to
the
ASL
5000
Breathing
Simulator.
5. Click
.
5
Figure
5-‐3:
IngMar
Medical
ASL
5000
Welcome
window
The
Welcome
window
now
presents
three
choices
(these
three
choices
are
available
with
the
licensed
RespiSim®
version).
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
5-‐4:
Welcome
window
choices
24
Based
on
your
purpose
of
use
and
requirement,
you
can:
• Select
Standard
Window
Manager
(SWM)
designed
primarily
for
engineers
and/or
researchers;
or,
• Select
RespiSim®
Window
Manager
(RWM)
designed
primarily
for
educators;
or,
• Select
User
Settings
to
modify
any
user
settings
as
an
advanced
user.
For
learning
more
about
modifying
User
Settings,
please
refer
to
User
Profiles,
page
152.
Now,
based
on
the
Window
Manager
of
your
choice,
follow
the
step-‐by-‐step
instructions
given
ahead
to
run
your
first
simulation.
2
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
1
Figure
5-‐5:
Welcome
window,
Full
System
Mode
On
the
Welcome
window:
1. Make
sure
the
slider
is
in
Full
System
Mode.
2. Click
.
• A
system
status
message
“Loading
ASL
5000
Software…”
appears
for
a
brief
moment
following
which
the
Standard
Window
Manager
opens
to
the
Run
Time
Home
tab.
25
3. Click
the
Script/Patient
Model
tab
to
begin
scripting
the
simulation.
2 3
Figure
5-‐6:
SWM
opened
to
Run
Time
Home
tab
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
26
4. From
the
Scenario
Scripts
sub-‐tab,
in
the
Directory
Contents
list,
click
script
file
Adult_Normal_unassisted.sct
(we
will
refer
to
this
example
as
our
practice
simulation
script
when
running
your
first
simulation).
4
Figure
5-‐7:
Scenario
selection
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
27
5
Figure
5-‐8:
Starting
the
Simulation
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
The
view
switches
to
the
Run
Time
Home
tab.
28
6. The
simulation
begins
after
you
select
a
location
for
saving
your
data
in
the
Select
an
Output
File
dialog
box.
As
there
is
no
particular
reason
to
save
the
data
in
a
special
location
for
this
practice
run,
simply
accept
the
default
location
by
clicking
OK.
7. Click
Replace
when
the
confirmation
message
appears.
The
practice
simulation
will
now
start
running.
6
7
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
5-‐9:
Running
a
Simulation
from
the
Run
Time
Home
tab
29
2
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
1
Figure
5-‐10:
Welcome
Window
RWM
A
system
status
message
“Loading
ASL
5000
Software…”
appears
for
a
brief
moment
following
which
the
RespiSim®
Window
Manager
opens
to
the
QuickChoice/Interactive
tab.
30
3. In
the
QuickChoice
Menu,
sequentially,
make
your
selection
of:
a)
Patient
Type
b)
Diagnosis
c)
Disease
Severity
And,
4. Click
.
5. Click
Start
Simulation
to
start
with
the
selected
patient
model.
You
will
be
asked
to
specify
a
location
for
the
data
output
set
of
the
simulation
3a 5
3b 8
b
3c
c
4
Please
carry
out
step
8
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
after
completing
step
5,
6,
and
7.
Continue
reading
ahead
for
steps
6
and
7.
Figure
5-‐11:
QuickChoice/Interactive
Patient
Model
Selection
31
6. The
simulation
begins
after
you
select
the
data
set
output
location
on
the
Select
an
Output
File
dialog
box.
6. As
there
is
no
particular
reason
to
save
the
data
in
a
special
location
for
this
practice
run,
simply
accept
the
default
location
by
clicking
.
7. Click
when
the
message
appears.
The
practice
simulation
will
now
start
running.
7
6
Figure
5-‐12:
Selecting
an
Output
Location
8. Click
Display
Waveforms
on
the
QuickChoice
tab
to
view
flow,
pressure,
and
volume
waveforms
(as
viewed
on
a
ventilator
screen).
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
32
9. The
waveforms
are
displayed
on
a
separate
Equation
of
Motion
Display
window.
9
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
10
Figure
5-‐13:
Equation
of
Motion
Waveform
View
To
study
the
contribution
of
the
different
components
of
the
Equation
of
Motion
in
detail,
you
may
review
the
last
single
breath
in
slow
motion.
10. To
do
so,
click
.
The
Equation
of
Motion
waveform
view
changes
to
display
a
single
breath.
33
13
11
12
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
5-‐14:
Equation
of
Motion
Single
Breath
View
11. Drag
the
green
cursor
line
through
the
waveform
to
see
the
change
in
contribution
of
each
component
of
the
equation
over
time
.
12. Click
Return
to
Simulation
to
get
back
to
the
real-‐time
view
of
the
simulation
Or,
13. Click
the
Close
“X”
button
at
the
top
right
corner
of
the
Equation
of
Motion
Display
window
to
close
the
Equation
of
Motion
waveform
view.
When
finished,
click
from
the
QuickChoice
tab.
34
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
6-‐1:
Types
of
Lung
Models
NOTE
Do
not
think
of
a
2
compartment
model
as
a
right
and
left
lung,
but
rather
as
regions
of
the
lung
with
similar
disease
states
and
therefore
similar
properties
35
In
either
case,
the
model
does
not
separate
between
lung
compliance
and
chest
wall
compliance.
A
patient’s
spontaneous
breathing
is
represented
by
patient
muscle
pressure
effort
Pmus
(Pchestwall
in
Figure
6-‐1
below),
entered
into
the
model
as
a
profile
that
you
can
shape
according
to
pre-‐configured
patterns
or
in
free
form
(import
from
files).
Figure
6-‐2:
Spontaneous
Effort
Profile
Notably,
such
effort
profiles
can
also
include
inverse
efforts
(active
exhalation),
making
the
simulated
patient,
for
example,
“fight”
the
ventilator
or
cough.
6.1.2 Smart
Pump
Models
Sometimes
it
is
not
necessary
to
use
a
model
that
responds
to
pressure
changes,
representing
an
actual
patient.
Rather,
a
flow
or
volume
pattern
is
desired
as
a
representation
of
just
the
spontaneous
breathing
activity.
For
this
purpose,
you
can
switch
to
Flow
Pump
Mode
or
Volume
Pump
Mode
instead
of
a
one-‐
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
6-‐3:
Pump
Modes
36
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
6-‐4:
List
of
Patient
Models
NOTE
These
models,
as
names
indicate,
include
patients
that
are
independently
breathing
spontaneously,
as
well
as
those
that
are
expected
to
be
on
ventilator
support.
When
working
in
the
RespiSim®
Window
Manager,
QuickChoice
allows
you
to
select
a
patient
model
from
the
QuickChoice
library
in
a
process
that
defines:
• Patient
Type
• Diagnosis
• Disease
Severity
Models
from
any
of
the
libraries
are
fully
editable
and
you
can
save
them
under
a
name
that
is
different
from
the
original
(protected)
name.
Please
see
Interactive
Control
Panel
Patient
Model
Library,
page
259,
referencing
the
parameters
of
these
models.
37
Script
Segments
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
6-‐5:
Script
Editor,
Manual
Scripting
View
NOTE
The
repetitions
in
the
script
do
not
necessarily
indicate
the
number
of
patient
breaths.
The
transitions
between
each
segment
(i.e.,
line)
in
a
script
normally
occur
without
transitioning
steps.
Each
segment,
however,
may
contain
model
components
that
vary
from
breath
to
breath,
so
that
“soft”
transitions
may
be
programmed
into
a
script.
38
For
the
use
of
such
time-‐varying-‐parameters,
please
refer
to
11.1
Advanced
Patient
Modeling.
You
can
also
use
time-‐varying-‐parameters
to
create
repeatable,
quasi-‐randomized
sequences
for
more
effective
testing
schemes.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
selecting:
• Patient
Type
• Diagnosis
• Disease
Severity
The
QuickChoice
Panel
is
part
of
the
RespiSim®
Window
Manager,
to
be
used
primarily
for
educational
simulations.
While
you
can
further
customize
the
standard
severity
selections
for
different
patient
types
and
diagnosis
from
the
QuickChoice
selections
(and,
again,
save
them
in
a
custom
library),
the
standard
patient
options
offer
a
quick
way
to
be
up
and
running
with
a
wide
array
of
educational
simulations.
39
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
40
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
To
do
so,
just
click
View
Current
Patient
Model
.
41
1
2
4 3
Figure
7-‐1:
The
Run
Time
Home
Tab
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Graph
Area
and
Options
(see
Figure
7-‐2
on
the
next
page):
5. The
large
graph
area
in
the
center
displays
waveforms
in
the
following
order:
Top
➤
Flow
Middle
➤
Pressure
Bottom
➤
Volume
6. Alternatively,
clicking
on
Loop
View
will
switch
to
displaying
loop
graphs.
Top
➤
Flow/Volume
loop
Bottom
➤
Pressure/Volume
loop
When
Loop
View
is
active,
the
button
will
switch
to
the
Wave
View
option .
42
The
waveform
graphs
contain
multiple
traces.
Depending
on
the
model
used
(one
or
two
compartment
model),
you
will
see
individual
traces
for
each
compartment’s
flow
and
volume.
The
additional
“piston”
traces
indicate
the
compound
flow
or
volume.
In
the
case
of
single
compartment
models,
these
will
match
the
trace
for
the
model
indicating
that
the
system
is
performing
the
expected
piston
moves
accurately.
7. To
change
trace
colors
or
make
a
trace
invisible,
right-‐click
on
any
of
the
graph
legend
items.
8. To
change
the
background
color,
for
example,
when
you
want
to
print
a
hard
copy
of
the
screen,
click
Help/Customize
from
the
top
menu
bar
and
the
Graph
Colors
submenu.
See
10.4
Appearance/General
Settings,
page
158,
for
more
information.
9. Click
to
“freeze”
the
graphs
for
better
viewing
of
details.
The
simulation,
however,
will
continue
uninterrupted.
8
Flow 6 9
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
7
5
Pressure
Volume
Figure
7-‐2:
Graph
Area
and
Options
43
Interactive Control, Debrief, Virtual Vent, Start/Stop Sim., and Set Pause:
10. Click
located
in
the
left
upper
corner
of
the
window
to
open
the
Interactive
Control
Panel.
(see
Figure
7-‐3)
11. The
Go
To
RespiSim®
Debrief
button
right
below
will
only
be
visible
if
your
copy
of
the
software
is
licensed
for
RespiSim.
Click
it
to
open
the
RespiSim®
Instructor
Debrief
window
from
which
you
can
also
access
the
Instructor
Dashboard.
12. In
the
right
upper
corner
the
Virtual
Vent
button
is
visible
when
you
are
running
the
software
in
Software
Only
Mode.
Click
Virtual
Vent
to
bring
up
the
Virtual
Ventilator
pane.
13
14
12
10
11
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
7-‐3:
Interactive
Control,
Debrief,
Virtual
Vent,
Start/Stop
Sim.,
and
Set
Pause
You
can
use
the
Virtual
Ventilator
to
simulate
the
effects
of
a
ventilator
(that
would
be
connected
to
the
ASL
5000)
if
you
were
running
your
simulation
in
Full
System
Mode.
(For
more
information
on
the
Virtual
Ventilator,
see
page
101)
44
13. Click Start Sim. to start a simulation from the Run Time Home tab. The button changes to Stop
14. To
pause
the
simulation,
click
Set
Pause
.
This
invokes
a
patient
model
“pause.vr3”
which
you
can
define
as
needed
(for
example
as
a
passive
patient,
or
one
who
breathes
in
a
particular
fashion).
NOTE
The
“Pause”
model
is
fully
editable.
You
can
select
and
edit
a
patient
model
that
is
convenient
to
use
whenever
you
would
like
to
interrupt
the
flow
of
a
simulation
without
actually
stopping
it.
Fill
Bar,
Create
Report,
and
Exit
Software
(see
Figure
7-‐4
on
the
next
page):
15. To
open
a
window
showing
a
colored
bar
graph
as
a
visual
aid
for
an
instructor
or
student,
click
Fill
Bar.
It
provides
feedback
on
a
patient’s
filling
of
the
lungs,
for
example
when
training
for
manual
ventilation
skills.
(also
see
Figure
7-‐20:
2-‐Compartment
Lung
Fill
Indicator,
page
66).
16. The
Create
Report
button
will
become
selectable
once
enough
data
has
been
collected
after
starting
a
simulation.
Click
Create
Report
to
generate
a
simple
report
showing
waveform
data
and
calculated
breath
parameters.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
17. In
situations
where
the
simulator
cannot
render
the
model
behavior
faithfully,
for
example
because
the
demanded
flow
rates
are
too
high
or
you
have
exceeded
the
volume
range
of
the
ASL
5000,
the
indicator
in
the
lower
right
corner
will
indicate
a
“large
volume
error.”
18. When
done,
click
to
close
the
software.
You
are,
at
this
point,
given
two
choices:
• To
save
any
changes
made
to
User
Settings
before
closing,
or
• To
return
to
the
Welcome
Window.
45
15
16
18
17
Figure
7-‐4:
Fill
Bar,
Create
Report,
and
Exit
Software
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
46
• Once
the
simulation
is
running,
you
can
click
the
Save
Waveform
Data
button
to
start
waveform
recording.
NOTE
ICP
settings
take
precedence
over
any
settings
that
might
otherwise
be
active,
either
from
a
script
or
from
RespiSim®
patient
settings
(see
also
page
113,
ICP
“rules”).
By
default,
the
Interactive
Control
Panel
starts
out
with
the
Patient
Library
tab
as
shown
in
Fig.
7-‐5
on
the
next
page.
2. Double-‐click
on
any
item
from
the
list
of
preconfigured
patient
models
to
activate
it
for
a
running
simulation.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
New
Feature
3. The
new
model
selected
will
be
phased
in
over
several
breaths.
The
Steps
Per
Change
setting
determines
how
many
iterations
are
used
to
fully
implement
the
new
model
settings
(see
also
10.6
Transition
Settings,
page
163).
NOTE
Switching
between
pre-‐configured
models
allows
you
to
make
changes
to
several
model
parameters
simultaneously,
with
one
click,
without
the
need
to
individually
adjust
each
parameter.
These
models
may
also
include
time-‐varying
patient
models
(see
page
173),
with
gradual
changes
over
extended
periods
of
time
(for
example,
to
simulate
induction
of
anesthesia).
4. The
active
patient
model
will
always
be
indicated
here.
47
5. Use
the
Browse
Folder
icon
to
change
to
a
different
directory,
for
example
to
create
a
user-‐
customized
library
of
patient
models.
NOTE
The
patient
model
library
auto-‐updates
if
items
have
been
added
or
deleted
from
it,
no
manual
refresh
is
needed.
6. In
order
to
assist
the
decision
making
process
of
your
students
during
a
simulation,
enter
values
for
vital
signs
into
the
template
and
click
the
Show
Vital
Signs
Monitor
button
.
The
Vital
Signs
Monitor
window
opens.
It
can
be
moved,
for
example,
to
a
second
screen
facing
students
working
on
a
simulation,
as
a
stand-‐in
for
a
patient
monitor.
(For
more
details
on
the
Vital
Signs
Monitor,
see
page
117
in
the
RespiSim®
section
of
this
manual)
1
5
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
4
2
6
3
Figure
7-‐5:
Interactive
Control
Panel
48
2
1
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
7-‐6:
Lung
Model
Parameters
tab
• To
change
a
parameter
you
can
either
“turn”
knobs
in
a
click-‐and-‐drag
move
or
enter
values
into
the
fields
below
the
respective
knob
and
press
Enter.
Knobs
turn
orange
while
the
change
is
being
applied,
after
which
they
revert
back
to
a
darker
green
color,
indicating
that
the
parameter
has
been
changed
from
its
original
value.
1. To
revert
a
change
that
you
have
made,
(i.e.,
return
to
the
model
that
was
running
when
ICP
was
invoked),
click
Revert
to
Original
Model
Settings.
• To
save
changes
made,
click
Save
Current
Model
Settings.
2. To
simply
view
the
current
patient
model
or
the
original
model
that
was
active
when
ICP
was
invoked,
click
View
Original
Model
Settings
or
View
Current
Patient
Model.
49
1
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
7-‐7:
Spontaneous
Breathing
Parameters
Tab
The
knobs
on
this
tab
define
all
aspects
of
the
effort
profile
of
the
interactively
modified
patient.
Please
see
page
38
in
the
Scripted
Simulations
section
for
details
of
the
patient
modeling
possibilities.
1. For
all
parameters
of
this
tab
to
be
active,
the
Closed
Loop
slider
on
the
left
needs
to
be
in
the
No
Loop
position.
Otherwise,
muscle
pressure
and,
possibly,
breath
rate
may
become
unavailable
(they
will
appear
grayed
out)
since
their
values
are
then
determined
automatically
by
the
control
loop
and
not
by
the
user.
50
7.2.3 Trends
The
Trends
tab
is
a
convenient
way
to
look
at
historical
data,
specifically
if
the
model
was
used
with
a
closed
loop
strategy,
where
patient
effort
and
breath
rate
may
change
to
maintain
a
specific
tidal
volume
Vt
or
minute
ventilation
MV.
It
shows
data
history
for
tidal
volume
Vt,
patient
effort
Pmus,
and
breath
rate.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
7-‐8:
Trends
Tab
51
3
2
1
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
7-‐9:
Closed
Loop
Vt
1. Before
using
the
Closed
Loop
Vt
tab,
you
must
select
Const.
Vt
in
the
Closed
Loop
selector.
2. Set
the
desired
Vt
value.
3. Set
upper
and
lower
limits
for
Pmus.
These
values
are
observed
as
thresholds
that
will
not
be
exceeded
while
auto-‐adjusting
patient
effort.
NOTE
If
the
patient
is
connected
to
a
ventilator,
adjusting
patient
effort
might
not
successfully
result
in
bringing
Vt
to
the
desired
value;
for
example
when
the
ventilator
uses
volume
control
and
is
set
to
deliver
a
higher
volume
than
the
Vt
set
in
the
Closed
Loop
Vt
tab.
Likewise,
set
thresholds
(3)
might
prevent
actual
values
from
reaching
the
desired
values.
52
2
3
1
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
7-‐10:
Closed
Loop
MV
1. Before
using
the
Closed
Loop
MV
tab,
you
must
select
Const.
MV
in
the
Closed
Loop
selector.
2. Set
the
desired
MV
value.
1. Set
upper
and
lower
limits
for
Pmus
and
for
breath
rate.
These
values
are
observed
as
thresholds
that
will
not
be
exceeded
while
auto-‐adjusting
patient
effort.
NOTE
If
the
patient
is
connected
to
a
ventilator,
adjusting
patient
effort
and
breath
rate
might
not
succeed
to
bring
MV
to
the
desired
value;
for
example
when
the
ventilator
uses
mixed
mode
control
and
is
set
to
deliver
a
higher
MV
than
the
MV
set
in
the
Closed
Loop
MV
tab.
Likewise,
set
thresholds
(3)
might
prevent
convergence
of
actual
and
desired
value.
53
2
1
4
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
3
Figure
7-‐11:
Closed
Loop
CO2
1. Before
using
the
Closed
Loop
CO2
tab,
you
must
select
CO2
in
the
Closed
Loop
selector.
2. Set
desired
Patient
Case
(type),
ETCO2
value,
and
CO2
production
limit.
54
3. Adjust
upper
and
lower
limits
for
Pmus
and
for
breath
rate
as
needed
to
keep
adjustments
within
a
physiologically
relevant
range.
These
values
are
observed
as
thresholds
that
will
not
be
exceeded
while
auto-‐adjusting
patient
effort.
4. Observe
that
the
ETCO2
set-‐point
and
actual
value
converge.
NOTE
Closed
Loop
CO2
has
no
effect
on
the
current
patient
model
(vr3-‐file)
being
run.
It
is
intended
for
didactic
training
only.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
7.3.1 Scenario
Scripts
From
the
Standard
Window
Manager,
click
the
Script/Patient
Model
tab
to
open
the
Simulation
Script
Editor,
which
opens
in
the
Scenario
Scripts
sub-‐tab
view.
WARNING!
Due
to
the
wide
variety
of
clinical
conditions
associated
with
different
lung
diseases,
it
is
not
always
possible
for
a
specific
patient
parameter
setting
to
be
representative
of
such
disease
states.
Scenarios
in
the
ASL
5000
software
are
therefore
intended
as
suggestions
only.
The
user
is
advised
to
apply
his
or
her
own
clinical
expertise
to
use
and
edit
the
scenario
scripts.
55
1
Figure
7-‐12:
Scenario
Scripts
Library
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
NOTE
You
can
also
reach
the
Simulation
Script
Editor
from
the
RespiSim®
Window
Manager
by
clicking
Show
Tools
under
the
ASL
Tools
menu
item.
Most
of
the
scripts
you
see
in
the
Scenario
Scripts
library
contain
simply
a
large
number
of
repetitions
of
the
patient
model
of
the
same
name
as
the
script
name
itself.
Exceptions
are
the
Kussmauls_Breathing
and
Adult_apnea
scripts.
1. For
example,
double-‐clicking
Adult_Normal_unassisted.sct
opens
a
script
that
looks
as
follows:
56
2
Figure
7-‐13:
Manual
Scripting
Each
line
in
a
script
can
be
edited
separately.
2. To
edit
a
line
in
the
script,
double-‐click
the
respective
line.
The
Step
1:
Select
Simulation
Parameter
Set
dialog
box
opens.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
3
4
Figure
7-‐14:
Simulation
Editor,
Step
1
57
You
may
also
click
Browse
to
select
a
different
patient
model
file
if
you
do
not
want
to
base
further
edits
on
the
file
presented
in
the
path
box.
3. Enter
the
number
of
repetitions
that
you
want
the
patient
model
to
be
exercised.
4.
Click
to
start
the
editing
process
in
the
Step
2:
Choose
a
Lung
Model
window.
6
5
7
8
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
7-‐15:
Lung
Model
Editing,
Step
2
On
this
page,
you
define
the
respiratory
mechanics
of
the
patient,
Resistance
R
and
Compliance
C.
5. Click
on
diagram
to
select
a
model:
At
the
top
of
the
Step
2
window,
choose
the
type
of
patient
model
that
you
want
to
use.
Select
a
patient
model
from
four
choices
by
clicking
the
respective
image
or
by
clicking
the
vertical
Up
and
Down
arrows
provided
next
to
the
image.
58
As
mentioned
before,
Flow
Pump
and
Volume
Pump
are
not
patient
models
in
the
true
sense,
since
they
do
not
contain
R
and
C
values.
Rather,
for
these
models,
patterns
of
flow
and
volume
are
set
directly
in
Step
3.
(For
step
3,
see
page
60)
The
number
of
available
parameters
depends
on
the
type
of
model
chosen.
In
the
case
of
a
single
compartment
model
where
inspiratory
and
expiratory
R
are
the
same,
there
are
only
two
parameters
to
select,
R
and
C.
Whereas,
in
a
more
complex
model,
(two
compartments
with
independent
inspiratory
and
expiratory
bronchial
resistors),
this
number
can
be
as
high
as
8.
For
further
details
on
the
different
models,
please
refer
section
Modeling
Based
on
Ventilatory
Mechanics,
page
255.
NOTE
Please
keep
in
mind
that
the
modeling
process
does
not
separate
between
lung
compliance
and
chest
wall
compliance,
but
rather
“lumps
together”
these
two
effects.
6. To
finish
modeling,
you
also
need
to
confirm
the
selection
of
the
residual
capacity
(URC)
of
the
model.
By
default,
this
is
set
to
0.5
L
and
you
can
leave
the
value
unchanged.
URC
defines
a
volume
inside
the
ASL
5000
cylinder
which
acts
similar
to
a
FRC
(functional
residual
capacity).
It
allows
forced
exhalation
below
the
baseline
volume.
NOTE
In
a
real,
adult
patient,
FRC
would
likely
exceed
2L,
but
for
the
benefit
of
a
more
compact
device,
this
volume
has
been
scaled
down.
You
can,
of
course,
increase
it,
when
larger
exhalations
otherwise
would
likely
be
limited.
Just
keep
in
mind
that,
in
this
case,
the
maximum
(positive)
tidal
volumes,
accordingly,
are
more
limited.
Other
advanced
modeling
parameters,
shown
in
the
bottom
half
of
the
STEP
2
window
(Compensations,
Non-‐Linear
Compliance,
Time-‐Varying
Parameters)
add
further
detail
to
the
patient.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
(also
see
Advanced
Patient
Modeling,
page
178)
7. Select
a
Waveform
Sampling
Rate
based
on
the
use
of
the
intended
data
set
and
the
length
of
the
simulation.
The
default
of
512
Hz
gives
maximum
resolution
in
the
time
domain
but
is
not
recommended
for
generating
data
sets
from
hours
of
simulation.
NOTE
The
Waveform
Sampling
Rate
for
the
entire
simulation
is
determined
by
the
first
patient
model
in
a
script.
The
setting
of
this
parameter
in
all
subsequent
script
entries
is
ignored.
8. Click
to
proceed
to
Step
3.
The
Step
3:
Choose
a
Patient
Effort
Model
window
opens.
59
9
Figure
7-‐16:
Patient
Effort
Model,
Step
3
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
You
will
select
the
patient’s
spontaneous
breathing
effort
from
a
number
of
basic
patterns,
or,
alternatively,
define
it
freely
via
a
single
column
of
data
points
from
a
spreadsheet
(see
File-‐Based
Patient
Effort,
page
182).
Patient
effort
may
also
be
entered
as
an
analog
signal
into
one
of
the
analog
inputs
of
the
ASL
5000.
The
pattern
selection
looks
as
follows:
60
For
a
realistic
rendering
of
a
patient’s
breathing
effort,
the
Sinusoidal
Half-‐Wave
is
most
commonly
used.
Please
see
Sinusoidal
Patient
Effort
in
Theory
of
Operation
section
(page
178)
for
details
of
the
setup
of
this
pattern.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
NOTE
While
an
argument
can
be
made
suggesting
that
the
release
of
muscle
pressure
in
a
real
patient
is
more
of
an
exponential
decay,
the
differences
in
the
actual
effect
on
flow
and
volume
are
minimal.
A
Trapezoidal
Half-‐Wave
pattern
performs
very
similar
to
a
Sinusoidal
Half-‐Wave,
with
straight
ramps
during
increase
and
release
of
effort.
Pressure
Trigger
shapes
the
pressure
waveform
as
a
rectangular
pressure
“blip”
(no
ramps),
defined
only
by
amplitude
and
duration.
For
the
condition
of
an
occluded
port,
this
setting
will
produce
a
rectangular
pressure
profile
as
airway
(mouth)
pressure.
Flow
Trigger
generates
a
constant
flow
defined
by
duration
and
amplitude.
The
pressure
profile
necessary
to
maintain
a
constant
flow
over
the
duration
of
the
effort
is
calculated
internally
to
overcome
just
the
effects
of
R
and
C
of
the
patient
model
in
a
no-‐load
situation
(open
port).
Actual
61
flow
levels
will
be
influenced
by
negative
pressure
in
the
circuit
when,
for
example,
flow
delivery
from
a
ventilator
is
delayed.
NOTE
Keep
in
mind
that
the
system
is
still
operating
within
the
context
of
a
respiratory
mechanics
model
that
responds
to
external
pressure.
For
flow
patterns
independent
from
pressure
changes,
use
the
Flow
Pump
Mode
or
Volume
Pump
Mode.
Less
predictable
effort
patterns
or
those
captured
from
actual
patients
are
entered
into
a
simulation
either
via
one
of
the
analog
inputs
of
the
ASL
5000
(External
Analog
Input)
or
as
a
user
specified
data
file
(User
specified
(freeform
from
file))
9. When
all
adjustments
to
the
settings
of
Patient
Effort
Model
are
made,
click
to
proceed
to
the
Step
4:
Save
Simulation
Parameter
Set
dialog
box,
to
save
the
parameters
of
the
edited
patient
model.
11
10
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
7-‐17:
Patient
Model
Save
As
dialog
box,
Step
4
10. Click
to
save
all
parameters
under
the
same
file
name
(after
confirmation
to
overwrite).
11. Click
to
open
a
dialog
box
for
choosing
a
new
file
name
and
path.
62
NOTE
Built-‐in
patient
models,
which
are
part
of
the
software
release,
cannot
be
altered.
You
may,
however,
save
a
patient
model
that
is
based
on
such
an
original
under
any
other
name
using
the
Save
As
option.
The
Save
button
will
be
unavailable
(grayed
out)
in
this
case
(see
Figure
7-‐17).
Finishing
the
Save
process
will
return
you
to
the
Script
Editor
tab.
• Click
to
run
the
script
if
you
modified
only
the
patient
model
parameters
but
kept
the
name
of
the
patient
model
file
same.
• If
you
used
a
new
name
for
the
patient
model
and
the
script
therefore
changed,
first
save
the
script
(either
under
its
previous
name
or
under
a
new
name).
• Click
View
Current
Patient
Model
at
any
time
from
the
Run
Time
Home
screen
to
see
a
summary
of
the
patient
model
parameters
that
are
active
in
the
simulation.
User’s Manual ASL 5000, SW 3 .6, Rev.1, © IngMar M edical, L td. 2016
Figure
7-‐18:
Current
Patient
Model
Summary
• Click
to
directly
access
the
patient
model
editor
from
this
window.
63
While
a
scripted
simulation
is
running,
you
can
monitor
the
progress
of
the
script
with
the
Current
Script
Progress
window.
• Click
on
the
Run
Time
Home
tab
of
the
Standard
Window
Manager.
The
Current
Script
Progress
window
will
open.
The
currently
executing
window
is
highlighted.
Figure
7-‐19:
Current
Script
Progress
window
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
64
To switch, click the Loop View button from the Waveform View. The button changes to Wave
View
.
In
Waveform
View,
a
simulation
run
creates
the
following
parameter
traces:
➤
Calculated
model
flow
for
compartment
1
➤
Calculated
model
flow
for
compartment
2
➤
Calculated
total
model
flow
➤
Simulator
(cylinder)
flow
➤
Airway
pressure
(this
is
the
pressure
measured
inside
the
simulator
cylinder)
➤
Calculated
tracheal
pressure
➤
Calculated
alveolar
pressure
for
compartment
1
➤
Calculated
alveolar
pressure
for
compartment
2
➤
Inverted
muscle
pressure
(the
programmed
pressure
profile
from
Step
3
of
the
simulation
editing
process)
➤
Calculated
model
volume
for
compartment
1
➤
Calculated
model
volume
for
compartment
2
➤
Calculated
total
model
volume
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
➤
Simulator
(cylinder)
volume
NOTE
No
corrections
for
barometric
pressure,
temperature,
etc.,
are
made
to
the
Run
Time
Home
displays
of
waveform
or
loop
graphs
to
render
true
BTPS
or
other
standard
gas
conditions.
Volumes
and
flows
displayed
there
are
geometric
values
at
the
existing
gas
temperature
and
represent
piston
movement.
• Click
Freeze
to
halt
the
display
of
all
waveforms
or
loops.
Move
the
cursor
around
on
the
“frozen”
graph.
Observe
the
numerical
value
indicated
in
the
corner
of
the
graph.
The
simulation
will
continue
to
progress
and
the
piston
will
still
be
moving.
Chart
Length
controls
the
time
for
the
overwriting
of
both
waveform
and
loop
graphs.
When
viewing
loops,
this
means
that
the
redraw
occurs
not
based
on
a
fixed
number
of
breaths
but
on
the
length
of
65
time
allowed
by
Chart
Length.
This
feature
accommodates
different
shapes
of
loops
based
on
parameter
changes,
all
in
one
graph.
If
you
prefer
to
have
auto-‐scaling
turned
off,
right-‐click
on
the
respective
graph
and
clear
the
Autoscale
Y
selection
in
the
pop-‐up
menu.
NOTE
Do
NOT
clear
the
Autoscale
X
option
as
this
will
render
your
graphs
invisible.
To
change
the
color
of
a
trace,
click
on
the
respective
plot
sample
in
the
legend
of
a
graph
and
select
the
new
color
from
the
color
palette
under
Color.
• Click
Fill
Bar
to
open
the
Fill
Bar
window.
A
real
time
bar
graph
indicates
in
a
visual
representation
the
amount
of
air
entering
each
lung
compartment.
A
single
bar
graph
is
shown
for
single-‐compartment
models.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
7-‐20:
2-‐Compartment
Lung
Fill
Indicator
• Enter
a
number
for
the
lower
and
upper
threshold.
Color
changes
of
the
bar
graph
are
controlled
by
these
thresholds.
Green
indicates
a
tidal
volume
Vt
that
is
within
range,
Black
indicates
a
low
Vt,
and
Red
is
used
for
Vt
that
exceeds
the
high
threshold.
66
Figure
7-‐21:
Data
Field
Real
Time
Information
Select
the
Enabled
in
the
Data
field
of
the
Run
Time
Home
screen
to
see
real
time
information
about:
• O2-‐concentration
(if
the
Fast
Oxygen
Measurement
is
installed)
• Barometric
pressure
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
• Gas
temperature
average
in
the
cylinder
• Cylinder
wall
temperature
(if
Cylinder
Temperature
Controller
is
installed)
• Auxiliary
analog
input
parameters.
If
no
ASL
5000
is
connected,
the
fields
will
show
default
parameters
as
indicated
in
above
image.
NOTE
The
gas
temperature
sensor
has
a
response
time
of
several
seconds
and
measures
an
averaged
temperature.
For
Working
with
Advanced
Features:
Analog
Inputs,
see
page
199.
Aux1
and
Aux2
indicate
the
input
voltage
to
these
channels
in
the
range
of
0
to
10
V.
TCP/IP
data
broadcast
for
both
breath
parameters
and
waveforms
is
also
supported
with
the
ASL
software
acting
as
a
server.
For
details,
see
TCP
Broadcast
Configuration,
page
198.
More
detailed
data
analysis
is
provided
via
the
Real
Time
Analysis
and
Post-‐Run
Analysis
tabs
from
the
Standard
Window
Manager.
67
1 2 3
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
7-‐22:
Real
Time
Analysis
Settings
68
New
Feature
Corrections
for
the
different
conditions
are
now
applied
to
the
saved
processed
data,
and
are
reflected
both
in
Real
Time
Analysis
and
in
Post-‐Run
Analysis
data
views.
The
raw
data
file
is
not
changed
based
on
the
selection
of
Conditions.
You
can
therefore
always
apply
different
volume
corrections
by
re-‐processing
data
sets
that
include
waveforms
(see
7.4.3.1,
Data
Re-‐
Processing,
on
page
73).
NOTE
The
selection
of
Conditions
is
always
made
at
the
time
of
data
processing,
i.e.,
either
from
the
Real
Time
Analysis
tab
or
when
re-‐processing
data
in
Post-‐Run
Analysis.
Individual
data
views
will
indicate
the
choice
but
will
not
allow
a
change
of
Conditions.
3. For
the
purpose
of
reducing
noise,
a
10-‐point
moving
average
filter
is
applied
to
the
pressure
readings
from
the
Paw
sensor
by
default.
Use
the
Pressure
Filter
drop-‐down
to
turn
this
filter
off
or
to
select
a
5Hz
Butterworth
filter.
4 5
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
6
7
Figure
7-‐23:
Real
Time
Analysis
Parameters
and
Breath
Detection
69
4. With
the
Auxiliary
Compensation
Parameters
you
can
compensate
in
effects
of
parasitary
circuit
compliance
and
resistance.
The
ventilator,
for
example
“sees”
both
the
programmed
patient
compliance
as
well
as
the
compliance
of
the
circuit
that
is
due
to
gas
compressibility.
If
the
ventilator
does
not
take
this
into
consideration,
for
example
by
using
a
pre-‐op
test
of
the
circuit,
its
readings
of
tidal
volume
will
not
match
the
readings
of
the
ASL
5000.
The
ASL
5000
will
only
report
what
the
patient
actually
has
received,
which
does
not
include
what
was
“lost”
in
the
circuit
compressibility.
If
you
enter
values
for
compliance
and
resistance
compensation,
you
will
include
those
amounts
in
the
ASL
5000’s
volume
readings
and
can
adapt
the
readings
to
a
non-‐compensating
ventilator.
NOTE
The
effects
just
mentioned
are
typically
negligible
when
working
with
adult
patients.
In
neonatal
applications,
however,
it
would
not
be
uncommon
that
half
of
the
volume
delivered
by
the
ventilator
never
makes
it
to
the
patient,
since
patient
compliance
and
circuit
compliance
are
approximately
of
the
same
size.
NOTE
Make
sure
not
to
confuse
this
type
of
compensation
with
the
“Compensations
On”
setting
in
the
Patient
Model
Editor.
There,
you
actually
manipulate
the
patient
model
settings
in
such
a
way
that
the
parasitary
effects
are
compensated
out
and
the
model
presents
to
the
ventilator
the
exact
parameters
programmed.
5. Breath
Detection
Settings
collectively
determine
what
actually
constitutes
a
breath
on
the
part
of
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
the
patient
(and
what,
on
the
other
hand
is
to
be
considered
simply
noise
or
unwanted
“wiggles”).
Breath
Start
Volume
Threshold
and
Exp
Start
Volume
Threshold
are,
by
default,
set
to
5mL.
You
will
need
to
adjust
these
down
for
neonatal
applications
(suggested:
0.5mL).
Effort
Start
Threshold
determines
what
patient
effort
(Pmus
signal)
is
considered
an
actual
spontaneous
effort.
6. 8
breath
parameters,
out
of
a
list
of
more
than
100,
are
simultaneously
displayed
in
the
Real
Time
Analysis
tab.
Click
any
of
the
parameters
and
select
a
different
parameter
from
the
list
that
pops
up.
7. The
volume
plot
in
the
Real
Time
Analysis
tab
serves
as
a
reality
check
for
breath
detection.
Markers
from
the
legend
need
to
appear
in
their
logical
sequence
in
the
plot,
in
all
detected
breaths,
for
a
meaningful
analysis.
70
NOTE
Please
be
aware
that
it
will
not
be
possible
for
the
breath
detection
algorithm
to
successfully
identify
breaths
under
all
circumstances.
It
is
therefore
recommended
to
always
perform
a
plausibility
check.
A
higher-‐than-‐expected
number
of
breaths
for
the
total
time
period
of
recorded
data
(viewed
in
the
Breath
Data
display),
for
example,
will
normally
indicate
an
improper
identification.
In
this
case,
small
fluctuations
most
likely
have
been
incorrectly
separated
into
individual
breaths,
and
an
increase
in
the
breath
detection
threshold
is
indicated.
An
example
would
be
a
situation
where
high
frequency
oscillations
are
superimposed
on
a
bi-‐level,
regular
breath
pattern.
7.4.3 Post-‐Run
Analysis
From
the
Standard
Window
Manager,
click
the
Post-‐Run
Analysis
tab
to
get
a
menu
of
various
analysis
views
accessible
after
a
simulation
has
completed.
1
User’s Manual ASL 5000, SW 3 .6, Rev.1, © IngMar M edical, L td. 2016
Figure
7-‐24:
Post-‐Run
Analysis,
Select
a
Simulation
71
The
Analysis
Menu
is
structured
from
left
to
right
to:
• Select
Files
( )
• Process/Preview
Data
(blue)
• View
Data
( )
• Performance
Analysis
( )
1. Click
Select
a
Simulation
and
navigate
to
a
simulation
data
set
in
the
window
that
opens.
You
will
either
see
all
buttons
become
selectable
or
just
the
Multi-‐Parameter
Trend
button,
depending
on
whether
waveforms
were
saved
during
the
simulation
or
not.
A
message
to
that
effect
is
also
displayed
as
a
note
on
the
panel.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
7-‐25:
Post-‐Run
Analysis
Menu
72
2
1
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
7-‐26:
Data
Re-‐Processing
Window
1. Select
a
volume
correction
Condition
from
the
drop
down
in
the
same
way
as
you
would
have
done
in
the
Real
Time
Analysis
tab.
New
Feature
Corrections
for
the
different
conditions
are
now
applied
to
the
saved
processed
data,
and
are
reflected
both
in
Real
Time
Analysis
and
in
Post-‐Run
Analysis
data
views.
The
raw
data
file
is
not
changed
based
on
the
selection
of
Conditions.
You
can
therefore
always
apply
different
volume
corrections
by
re-‐processing
data
sets
that
include
waveforms.
(See
also
7.4.2).
73
NOTE
The
selection
of
Conditions
is
always
made
at
the
time
of
data
processing,
i.e.,
either
from
the
Real
Time
Analysis
tab
or
when
re-‐processing
data
in
Post-‐Run
Analysis.
Individual
data
views
will
indicate
the
choice
but
will
not
allow
a
change
of
Conditions.
2. Additional
adjustments
pertain
mostly
to
ventilator
performance
analysis.
They
may
include:
• Insp.
Waveform
SD
Threshold
• Fraction
of
Target
for
Steady
State
• Inspiratory
Target
Override
• Expiratory
Target
Override
• Inspiratory
Breath
Type
Override
Insp.
Waveform
SD
Threshold
is
a
setting
to
be
used
by
the
algorithm
for
determining
the
type
of
the
inspiratory
waveform
(pressure
or
flow
as
the
primary
control
variable).
It
is
the
fraction
of
the
mean
below
which
the
standard
deviation
of
pressure
must
fall
to
consider
it
the
primary
control
variable.
This
setting
does
normally
not
require
adjustment.
Fraction
of
Target
for
Steady
State
determines
at
what
point
after
a
transient
a
new
steady
state
is
assumed
because
the
overshoot
etc.
stays
within
certain
limits.
The
default
value
is
0.1
(=10%
of
target)
and
usually
never
needs
to
be
adjusted.
For
Inspiratory
Target
Override
and
Expiratory
Target
Override
you
can
enter
values
if
you
know
what
target
pressures
were
set
on
the
ventilator
(as
it
is
recommended
that
you
not
leave
it
to
the
ASL
5000
algorithm
to
determine
this
from
the
data
in
those
cases).
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Sometimes
it
is
difficult
to
determine
whether
breath
delivery
was
following
a
constant
flow
or
constant
pressure
scheme.
For
Inspiratory
Breath
Type
Override,
you
can
enter
a
“0”
as
the
override
value
for
constant
flow
ventilation
or
a
“1”
indicating
that
constant
pressure
approach
had
been
used
(pressure-‐controlled
ventilation).
Click
to
produce
new
breath
parameter
(*.brb)
and
processed
waveform
data
(*.dtb)
files.
The
*.dtb
file
contains
the
processed
data
with
additional
calculations
for
flow,
etc.
The
already
existing
files
in
the
data
set
of
the
same
name
will
be
overwritten.
However,
the
raw
data
in
the
set
remains
unchanged,
which
means
that
you
can
perform
further
reprocessing,
for
example
with
changed
threshold
parameters,
if
needed.
Click
to
close
the
window
and
return
to
the
Post-‐Run
Analysis
tab
on
the
Standard
Window
Manager.
You
may
also
have
several
analysis
windows
open
at
the
same
time.
74
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
1
5
4
Figure
7-‐27:
Raw
Data
Preview
75
7.4.3.3 Breath
by
Breath
Data
1. In
the
Breath
by
Breath
Display
area,
at
the
top
left
side
of
the
window
you
will
find
this
button-‐set
for
navigating
through
a
waveform
recording,
in
this
view
separated
into
each
individual
breath
that
was
detected
by
the
ASL
5000’s
algorithms.
The
BreathType
field
will
read
Spontaneous
if
there
was
any
patient
effort
during
the
breath;
otherwise
the
same
field
will
read
Mechanical.
The
volume
correction
Conditions
follow
what
was
set
for
either
real
time
analysis
or
during
re-‐processing
of
the
data
set.
2. Four
sets
of
numerical
parameters
characterize
each
individual
breath:
• Timing
• Inspiratory
Flow
• Pressures
• Volumes
1
3
4
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
2
Figure
7-‐28:
Breath
by
Breath
Display
3. To
select
the
breath
by
breath
waveform
for
each
of
the
three
graphs
individually
from
its
drop-‐
down
list,
click
the
respective
drop
down
menus
of
the
Flow,
Pressure,
and
Volume,
fields.
76
The
cursor
palette
shows
the
X
and
Y
coordinates
for
the
horizontal
and
vertical
cursor.
• Right-‐click
on
the
cursor
name
and
select
Go
to
Cursor
to
move
the
displayed
region
of
the
graph
to
make
the
cursor
visible.
• Select
Bring
to
Center
to
move
the
cursor
position
in
the
center
of
the
graph.
4. Click
the
magnify
icon
in
the
graph
palette
to
select
a
zoom
tool.
Click
or
to
change
the
number
of
decimal
digits
in
the
graph
labeling.
Click
to
close
the
window
and
return
to
the
Post-‐Run
Analysis
tab
on
the
Standard
Window
Manager.
You
may
also
have
several
analysis
windows
open
at
the
same
time.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
77
3
2
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
78
7.4.3.5 Loops
The
familiar
navigation
through
all
detected
breaths
via
this
button
set
is
moved
to
the
right
side
of
this
window,
as
is
the
indicator
for
Conditions.
1. Click
the
X
and
Y
legend
of
the
loop
graph
and
select
a
parameter
for
each
axis
from
its
drop-‐down
list.
2. The
loop
is
separated
into
Inspiration
and
Expiration,
with
a
dividing
line
from
the
graph
origin
to
the
point
of
volume
maximum,
where
inspiration
turns
into
expiration.
3. The
cursor
palette
shows
the
X
and
Y
coordinates
for
the
horizontal
and
vertical
cursor.
• Right-‐click
on
the
cursor
name
and
select
Go
to
Cursor
to
move
the
displayed
region
of
the
graph
and
make
the
cursor
visible.
• Select
Bring
to
Center
to
move
the
cursor
position
in
the
center
of
the
graph.
4. Click
the
magnify
icon
in
the
graph
palette
to
select
a
zoom
tool.
Click
or
to
change
the
number
of
decimal
digits
in
the
graph
labeling.
• Click
to
close
the
window
and
return
to
the
Post-‐Run
Analysis
tab
on
the
Standard
Window
Manager.
You
may
also
have
several
analysis
windows
open
at
the
same
time.
1
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
3
2
4
1
Figure
7-‐30:
Loop
View
79
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
2
Figure
7-‐31:
Multi-‐Parameter
Waveforms
80
User’s Manual ASL 5000, SW 3 .6, Rev.1, © IngMar M edical, L td. 2016
Figure
7-‐32:
Multi-‐Parameter
Trend
81
3. A
horizontal
line
of
the
respective
trace
color
represents
the
mean
of
the
parameter
values
between
(and
including)
the
vertical
cursors.
Its
numerical
value,
together
with
the
standard
deviation
is
also
shown.
• Click
to
close
the
window
and
return
to
the
Post-‐Run
Analysis
tab
on
the
Standard
Window
Manager.
You
may
also
have
several
analysis
windows
open
at
the
same
time.
7.4.3.8 Work
Calculations
and
PV
Loops
The
Work
Calculations
and
PV
Loops
view
provides
a
summary
of
all
work-‐of-‐breathing
related
parameters
calculated
by
the
ASL
5000
software.
The
calculations
are
provided
as
Work
(mJ),
Power
(mJ/s)
and
Work
per
Volume
(mJ/L).
1. Work
calculations
are
based
on
different
reference
points:
• Patient
Work
(Pmus)
• Externally
imposed
work
(Paw,
ventilator
work)
• Total
system
work
(combination
of
both)
For
further
details
on
WOB,
please
refer
to
the
Theory
of
Operation
section
of
this
Manual,
specifically
to
An
Introduction
to
Ventilatory
Mechanics
(page
236).
The
loop
graph
shows
the
Pressure
Volume
Loop;
therefore,
the
areas
under
the
curves
represent
imposed
WOB.
The
graph
uses
colors
to
differentiate
between
the
inspiratory
and
expiratory
part
of
the
loop.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
2. A
dividing
line
runs
from
the
graph
origin
to
the
point
of
volume
maximum,
where
inspiration
turns
into
expiration.
3. The
familiar
navigation
through
all
detected
breaths
via
this
button
set
is
also
part
of
this
window,
as
are
indicators
for
Conditions
and
Breath
Type.
4. The
cursor
palette
shows
the
X
and
Y
coordinates
for
the
horizontal
and
vertical
cursor.
• Right-‐click
on
the
cursor
name
and
select
Go
to
Cursor
to
move
the
displayed
region
of
the
graph
and
make
the
cursor
visible.
• Select
Bring
to
Center
to
move
the
cursor
position
in
the
center
of
the
graph.
5. Click
the
magnify
icon
in
the
graph
palette
to
select
a
zoom
tool.
Click
or
to
change
the
number
of
decimal
digits
in
the
graph
labeling.
82
3
1
2
5
4
Figure
7-‐33:
Work
Calculations
and
PV
Loops
• Click
to
close
the
window
and
return
to
the
Post-‐Run
Analysis
tab
on
the
Standard
Window
Manager.
You
may
also
have
several
analysis
windows
open
at
the
same
time.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
7.4.3.9 Trigger
Analysis
The
Trigger
Analysis
view
summarizes
parameters
and
time
marks
related
to
the
response
of
a
ventilator
to
the
patient’s
spontaneous
effort.
Since
the
ASL
5000
knows
the
exact
start
point
of
the
inspiratory
effort,
trigger
time
delay
is
calculated
from
this
point
to
the
time
where
airway
pressure
returns
to
baseline
(zero
or
PEEP).
The
two
components
of
this
time
span,
i.e.,
time
to
reach
the
minimum
pressure,
and
time
to
return
to
baseline
pressure,
are
also
indicated
explicitly.
Please
also
refer
to
page
88,
Parameter
Definitions.
83
3
4 5
2
1
Figure
7-‐34:
Trigger
Analysis
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
NOTE
The
lowest
point
in
the
volume
excursion
is
used
to
determine
the
start
of
a
breath.
Depending
on
the
circumstances,
this
might
not
always
be
appropriate.
You
may,
for
example,
encounter
situations
where
the
patient’s
effort
starts
after
this
point
and
the
algorithms
used
may
not
be
able
to
appropriately
determine
whether
there
actually
was
a
triggered
breath
or
not.
A
visual
plausibility
check
of
the
traces
in
the
graph
is
therefore
always
recommended.
You
can
then
determine
a
trigger
time
manually.
1. Move
the
vertical
cursor
marked
Trigger
to
manually
select
a
trigger
point.
2. You
will
see
the
difference
between
the
original
and
the
new
trigger
point
as
trigger
time
difference.
3. Click
to
update
the
calculation
in
the
Trigger
Analysis
view.
4. The
familiar
navigation
through
all
detected
breaths
via
this
button
set
is
also
part
of
this
window,
as
are
indicators
for
Conditions
and
Breath
Type.
84
5. Click
the
magnify
icon
in
the
graph
palette
to
select
a
zoom
tool.
Click
or
to
change
the
number
of
decimal
digits
in
the
graph
labeling.
• Click
to
close
the
window
and
return
to
the
Post-‐Run
Analysis
tab
on
the
Standard
Window
Manager.
You
may
also
have
several
analysis
windows
open
at
the
same
time.
7.4.3.10 Ventilator
Performance
Analysis
The
Ventilator
Performance
Analysis
view
is
a
breath-‐by-‐breath
display
of
parameters
for
assessing
the
constant
delivery
of
flow
or
pressure
by
the
ventilator.
Therefore,
user
discretion
is
advised
when
using
these
parameters
to
judge
breath
delivery.
If
there
was,
based
on
the
mode
of
the
ventilator,
no
target
of
either
flow
or
pressure,
the
calculated
parameters
have
no
basis.
If
there
was,
however,
a
clear
target,
you
can
either
accept
the
calculated
value
of
that
target
or
manually
enter
a
different
value
as
a
manual
target
override
before
re-‐processing
data
(see
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
85
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
86
Data,
page
74).
3
2
1
1 User’s Manual ASL 5000, SW 3 .6, Rev.1, © IngMar M edical, L td. 2016
4
Figure
7-‐35:
Ventilator
Performance
Analysis
• Click
to
close
the
window
and
return
to
the
Post-‐Run
Analysis
tab
on
the
Standard
Window
Manager.
You
may
also
have
several
analysis
windows
open
at
the
same
time.
87
Figure
7-‐36:
Timing
of
Pressure,
Flow,
and
Volume
in
a
Typical
Breath
(Points
A...F
in
the
following
table
refer
to
Figure
7-‐36,
above)
Table
7-‐1:
Definitions
of
Time
Marks
in
a
Breath
Parameter
Label/Unit
Definition
Comment
Effort
previous
breath)
The
time
Serves
as
the
zero
point
for
each
breath
(time
stamp
count)
at
which
in
the
time
domain.
If
no
spontaneous
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
88
Start
[Start
Exp]
The
time
stamp
for
the
The
time
stamp
for
the
beginning
of
Expiration
beginning
of
expiration.
expiration.
Point
F
Time
when
the
Exp
Start
Volume
threshold
(counted
down
from
Volume
Threshold
has
been
the
volume
maximum
in
a
breath)
exceeded.
default
value
is
5mL,
suitable
for
adult
size
models,
0.5mL
is
recommended
for
neonatal
models.
Time
to
Pmin
ms
The
time
interval
to
the
From
Point
A
to
Point
C
after
SoE
largest
Paw
depression
below
baseline
pressure
occurs,
calculated
from
[SoE].
Trigger
Time
[Ttrig]
Point
in
time
at
which
From
Point
A
to
Point
D
airway
pressure
has
returned
to
baseline
after
a
downward
deflection
(i.e.,
the
pressure
level
before
the
start
of
inspiratory
effort).
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
7.4.4.1 Parameters
in
the
*.brb-‐(Breath
Parameter)
File
Parameters
appear
in
alphabetical
order
of
names
in
the
drop-‐down
menus
in
the
analysis
windows.
Parameter
names
are
given
as
they
are
used
in
drop-‐down
menus
in
the
analysis
windows.
[name]
and
[unit]
indicate
parameter
names
and
units
in
brb-‐file
(where
different).
For
points
A...F
refer
to
Figure
7-‐36).
Table
7-‐2:
brb-‐File
Parameters
Parameter
Unit
Definition
Comment
%
of
Peak
Flow
%
Relative
flow
at
the
time
A
measure
of
the
rapid
opening
of
an
when
exp
20
ms
before
[Start
expiratory
valve
of
a
ventilator
(at
Point
F).
begins
Expiration]
Parameter
definition
changed
in
sw
3.5
(20
ms)
89
Ambient
Temp
oC
Gas
temperature
inside
This
is
always
an
average
temperature
the
cylinder
as
measured
Added
parameter
in
sw
3.4
by
the
ASL
5000’s
own
gas
temp.
sensor
Auto-‐PEEP
1
cmH2O
P_compartment_1
-‐
Pcompartment_1
=
Alveolar
Pressure
in
[PEEP_1auto]
Paw
at
[End
of
Expiration]
Compartment
1
of
the
lung
model
Added
parameter
in
sw
3.3
Auto-‐PEEP
2
cmH2O
P_compartment_2
-‐
Pcompartment_2
=
Alveolar
Pressure
in
[PEEP_2auto]
Paw
at
[End
of
Expiration]
Compartment
2
of
the
lung
model
Added
parameter
in
sw
3.3
Aux
1
Volt
[V]
Signal
on
channel
1
of
Default
value,
when
no
source
is
connected,
analog
input
(0-‐10V)
is
5
V
Aux
2
Volt
[V]
Signal
on
channel
2
of
Default
value,
when
no
source
is
connected,
analog
input
(0-‐10V)
is
5
V
Breath
Num.
integer
The
number
of
the
breath
Only
breaths
that
exceed
the
inspiratory
and
starting
from
the
expiratory
volume
thresholds
are
counted,
beginning
of
the
eliminating
“volume
noise”.
The
count
is
"a
simulation,
as
determined
posteriori",
independent
from
ventilator
or
by
the
analysis
software
model
settings!
Breath
Rate
BPM
Overall
breath
rate
Combines
mechanical
and
spontaneous
[ftot]
calculated
from
the
time
breaths
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
End
Exp
Index
integer
Time
stamp
for
End
of
Internally
used
index
for
marking
the
times
expiration
=
Start
of
a
new
of
specific
events
during
a
breath
cycle.
breath
cycle
Spacing
is
(1/data
rate),
default
at
1/512
E
Time
s
Expiratory
time,
counted
Between
Point
E
(or
just
before
F)
and
G
from
[StartExp]
to
[EndExp]
Exp
Active
mJ
If
[Exp
Work]
is
<
0,
[Exp
A
Total
System
Work
parameter,
Expiratory,
Work
Active
Work]
=
-‐[Exp
Active
Work],
zero
otherwise
90
Exp
Settling
ms
Time
from
[Start
Exp]
to
Will
always
refer
to
pressure
Time
the
point
where
fluctuations
around
[target]
are
less
than
10%
Exp
T90
ms
The
time
to
accomplish
A
ventilator
performance
parameter
90%
of
the
drop
from
peak
pressure
to
[Exp
Target]
(PEEP)
Exp
Target
cmH2O
The
pressure
at
steady
If
known
in
advance
(for
example,
because
it
state
during
expiration
is
a
ventilator
setting)
this
parameter
may
be
(where
steady
state
is
set
via
an
override
in
the
Post
Analysis
Data
derived
from
median
Re-‐Processing
window
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
airway
pressure
during
expiration),
normally
equivalent
to
PEEP
Exp
Vt
mL
Expiratory
tidal
volume
From
start
of
expiration
to
end
of
expiration
Exp
Work
mJ
∫
(Pairway
-‐
PEEP
+
Pmus)
A
Total
System
Work
parameter,
Expiratory
dV
from
[Start
Exp]
to
Definition
changed
with
sw
3.3
[End
of
Exp]
Ext
Exp
Res
mJ
[Ext
Insp
Elastic
Work
-‐
An
external
(imposed)
WOB
parameter,
Work
External
Exp.
Work]
Expiratory
Added
parameter
in
sw
3.3
91
Ext
Exp
Vent
mJ
If
[Ext
Exp
Work]
is
<
0,
An
external
(imposed)
WOB
parameter,
Work
[Ext
Exp
Active
Work]
=
-‐ Expiratory
[Ext
Exp
Work],
zero
Added
parameter
in
sw
3.3
otherwise
Ext
Exp
Work
mJ
∫(Pairway
-‐
PEEP)
dV
from
An
external
(imposed)
WOB
parameter,
[Start
Exp]
to
[End
of
Exp]
Expiratory
Added
parameter
in
sw
3.3
Ext
Insp
Res
mJ
[Ext
Insp
Work]
-‐
[Ext
An
external
(imposed)
WOB
parameter,
Work
Elastic
Work]
Inspiratory
Added
parameter
in
sw
3.3
Ext
Insp
Elastic
mJ
((Pairway{at
Vmax}
-‐
An
external
(imposed)
WOB
parameter,
Work
PEEP)
x
[Vmax-‐Vo]
-‐
(Pmin
Inspiratory
x
[Vo-‐Vmin
Added
parameter
in
sw
3.3
]))
/
2,
where
Vo
is
volume
Parameter
definition
changed
in
sw
3.5
at
Paw=PEEP
and
Pmin
is
the
smallest
pressure
during
inspiration
Ext
Insp
Work
mJ
∫
(Pairway
-‐
PEEP)
dV
from
An
external
(imposed)
WOB
parameter,
[SoI]
to
[StartExp]
Inspiratory
Added
parameter
in
sw
3.3
Heat
mJ
If
[Exp
Work]
is
>
0,
[Heat
A
Total
System
Work
parameter,
Expiratory
Production
Production]
=
[Exp
Work],
zero
otherwise
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
I
Time
s
Inspiratory
time
counted
Between
Point
A
and
Point
E
(or
just
before
F)
from
the
minimum
to
the
maximum
volume
(positive
flow
is
detected)
I/E
ratio
Inspiratory
time
/
Inspiratory
time
includes
a
potential
pause
Expiratory
time
time
Ins
Settling
ms
Time
from
[Start
Insp]
at
A
ventilator
performance
parameter
Time
which
inspiratory
steady
state
(insp.
pressure
or
flow
between
0.9
...
1.1
of
target)
is
reached
Insp
%
%
[I
Time]
expressed
as
%
Between
Points
A
and
E
(or
just
before
F)
92
Insp
Breath
flag
Pressure
controlled
or
Based
on
the
behavior
of
pressure
and
flow,
Type
Flow
controlled
an
algorithm
determines
the
type
of
the
breath
(and
the
target
and
performance
parameters
are
selected
accordingly
Insp
Elastic
mJ
((Paw{at
Vmax}-‐ A
Total
System
Work
parameter,
Inspiratory,
Work
PEEP+Pmus)
x
(Vmax-‐Vo)
-‐
Elastic
({Paw-‐PEEP
+Pmus}min
x
[Vo-‐Vmin]))
/
2,
where
Vo
is
volume
at
Paw=PEEP
and
{Pairway-‐
PEEP+Pmus}min
is
the
smallest
value
during
inspiration
Insp
Mean
cmH2O2
Mean
squared
pressure
or
A
ventilator
performance
parameter,
either
Squared
Error
or
flow
deviation
from
[Insp
a
value
of
pressure
or
of
flow,
depending
on
(L/min)2
Target]
during
inspiratory
the
type
of
inspiratory
breath
delivered
by
flow
time
the
ventilator
Insp
Overshoot
%
Pressure
(or
flow)
A
ventilator
performance
parameter,
a
value
overshoot
relative
to
[Insp
derived
of
either
pressure
or
flow,
Target]
depending
on
the
type
of
inspiratory
breath
delivered
by
the
ventilator
Insp
Res
Work
mJ
[Insp
Work]
-‐
[Insp
Elastic
A
Total
System
Work
parameter,
Inspiratory,
Work]
Resistive
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Insp
T90
ms
The
time
to
accomplish
A
ventilator
performance
parameter,
either
90%
of
the
rise
to
[Insp
a
value
of
pressure
or
of
flow,
depending
on
Target]
pressure
or
flow
the
type
of
inspiratory
breath
delivered
by
the
ventilator
Insp
Target
cmH2O
The
pressure
(or
flow)
at
If
known
in
advance
(for
example,
because
it
or
steady
state
during
is
a
ventilator
setting)
this
parameter
may
be
(L/min)
inspiration
(where
steady
set
via
an
override
in
the
Post
Analysis
>
state
is
derived
from
Data
Re-‐Processing
window
median
pressure
during
the
middle
part
of
inspiration)
Insp
Vt
mL
Tidal
volume
measured
Note
that
threshold
size
does
not
affect
from
SoI
to
[Peak
Volume]
reported
tidal
volumes
93
Insp
Work
mJ
∫(Pairway
-‐
PEEP
+
Pmus)
A
Total
System
Work
parameter.
dV
from
[SoI]
to
[StartExp]
Definition
changed
with
sw
3.3
Max
Flow
Acc
L/s2
Maximum
change
of
slope
Parameter
may
be
used
as
a
measure
of
a
of
the
Insp.
flow
curve.
ventilator’s
“flow
ramp”
setting
Max
Pres
Drop
cmH2O
Deflection
of
airway
A
parameter
that
can
be
used
to
evaluate
During
Trig
pressure
from
baseline
the
quality
of
CPAP
or
the
adequacy
of
flow
[PEEP]
to
[Pmin]
settings
Mean
Flow
L/min
Mean
value
of
flow
taken
Value
derived
from
flow
taken
over
from
[SoI]
to
[Ppeak]
inspiratory
part
of
a
cycle,
excluding
a
flow
pause,
if
it
exists
Median
Exp
cmH2O/
Median
of
{(Pairway
-‐
Values
of
exp.
flow
less
than
2
L/min
are
Res
(L/s)
Median
of
Pairway)
/
excluded
from
the
calculation
(dV/dt)}
during
expiration
Median
Flow
L/min
Median
value
of
flow
Value
derived
from
flow
taken
over
taken
from
[SoI]
to
inspiratory
part
of
a
cycle,
excluding
a
flow
[Ppeak]
pause,
if
it
exists
Min
Flow
Acc
L/s2
Maximum
(initial,
A
measure
for
the
level
of
a
patient
“cough”
negative)
change
of
slope
(forced
exhalation)
for
the
Exp.
flow
curve.
Oxygen
%
Oxygen
concentration
Value
will
be
assumed
to
be
20.9
vol%
if
no
measured
in
the
ASL
oxygen
sensor
is
connected
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
cylinder
Pat
Exp
Muscle
mJ
If
[Pat
Exp
Work]
is
<
0,
A
Patient
Work
parameter
Work
[Pat
Exp
Muscle
Work]
=
-‐
[Pat
Exp
Work],
zero
otherwise
Pat
Exp
Res
mJ
[Pat
Insp
Elastic
Work]
-‐
A
Patient
Work
parameter,
Expiratory,
Work
[Pat
Exp
Work]
Resistive
Pat
Exp
Work
mJ
-‐∫Pmus
dV
from
[Start
A
Patient
Work
parameter,
Expiratory
Exp]
to
[End
of
Exp]
Pat
Heat
mJ
If
[Pat
Exp
Work]
is
>
0,
A
Patient
Work
parameter,
Expiratory
Production
[Pat
Heat
Production]
=
[Pat
Exp
Work],
zero
otherwise
94
Pat
Total
Res
mJ
[Pat
Insp
Res
Work]
+
[Pat
A
Patient
Work
parameter,
Resistive
Work
Exp
Res
Work]
Pat
Trig
Work
mJ
∫Pmus
dV
from
[SoE]
to
A
Patient
Work
parameter,
Trigger
Work,
to
PEEP
[Trigger
Time]
(during
(see
also
its
components):
Trigger
Response
Time)
Work
between
SoE
and
Pmin
and
Work
between
Pmin
and
PEEP
Pause
%
%
[Pause
time]
expressed
as
%
Pause
Time
s
Time
counted
from
the
Algorithm
uses
peak
pressure
instead
of
point
of
maximum
peak
volume
pressure
to
[StartExp]
Parameter
calculation
changed
in
sw
3.5
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
P_awTime
cmH2O*ms
∫
(Pairway
-‐
PEEP)
dt
from
(prior
to
sw
3.4
labeled:
Pressure
Time
Product
[SoE]
to
[End
of
Product
also
in
drop-‐downs)
[Pressure
Time
Product]
Inspiration]
P_aw_TPtrigger
cmH2O*ms
∫
(Pairway
-‐
PEEP)
dt
from
May
be
used
as
a
substitute
for
Trigger-‐WOB
[SoE]
to
[Time
to
PEEP
Added
parameter
in
sw
3.5
after
Pmin]
P_aw_TP300
cmH2O*ms
∫
(Pairway
-‐
PEEP)
dt
from
[SoE]
to
300
ms
Added
parameter
in
sw
3.5
95
P_mean
cmH2O
Average
pressure
over
the
Includes
any
offset
due
to
PEEP/CPAP
full
breath
cycle
(Definition
has
been
restored
to
previous,
was
averaged
over
the
inspiratory
cycle
in
sw
3.3
only!)
P_mean
Ch1
cmH2O
Average
pressure
for
Includes
any
offset
due
to
PEEP/CPAP
comp.
1
over
the
full
Added
parameter
in
sw
3.5
breath
cycle
P_mean
Ch2
cmH2O
Average
pressure
for
Includes
any
offset
due
to
PEEP/CPAP
comp.
2
over
the
full
Added
parameter
in
sw
3.5
breath
cycle
P_mean
Insp
cmH2O
Average
pressure
over
the
Includes
any
offset
due
to
PEEP/CPAP
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
96
P_mean
Ch1
cmH2O
Average
pressure
for
Includes
any
offset
due
to
PEEP/CPAP
Exp
comp.
1
over
the
Added
parameter
in
sw
3.5
expiratory
part
of
the
breath
cycle
P_mean
Ch2
cmH2O
Average
pressure
for
Includes
any
offset
due
to
PEEP/CPAP
Exp
comp.
2
over
the
Added
parameter
in
sw
3.5
expiratory
part
of
the
breath
cycle
P_min
cmH2O
Lowest
pressure
reached
during
a
breath
cycle,
typically
during
inspiration
P_mus
Time
cmH2O*ms
∫Pmus
dt
from
[SoE]
to
Pmus
Pressure-‐Time
Product
Product
[PmusTP]
[End
of
Effort]
Added
parameter
in
sw
3.3
P_pause
cmH2O
Pressure
at
start
of
Calculated
as
median
of
pressure
between
expiration
time
of
peak
pressure
and
[StartExp]
Ppeak
cmH2O
Peak
pressure
Highest
pressure
during
the
breath
cycle
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
baseline
pressure,
counting
from
[Time
to
Pmin]
Time
to
Pmin
ms
[Time
to
Pmin
after
SoE]
See
also
[Time
between
Pmin
and
PEEP]
and
after
Start
of
[Time
to
Trigger]
Effort
Time
to
Trigger
ms
[Time
to
Pmin
after
SoE]
+
With
this
definition
trigger
delays
are
[Time
between
Pmin
and
measured
as
the
total
time
it
takes
for
a
PEEP]
ventilator
to
supply
pressure
sufficient
to
restore
baseline
pressure,
counting
from
the
very
beginning
of
patient
effort,
see
also
[Time
to
Pmin
after
Start
of
Effort]
and
[Time
between
Pmin
and
PEEP]
Total
PEEP
1
cmH2O
PEEP
+
PEEP_1auto
Total
PEEP
in
Compartm.
1
of
the
lung
model
[PEEP_1tot]
Added
parameter
in
sw
3.3
97
Parameter
Unit
Definition
Comment
Total
PEEP
2
cmH2O
PEEP
+
PEEP_2auto
Total
PEEP
in
Compartment
2
of
the
lung
[PEEP_2tot]
model
Added
parameter
in
sw
3.3
Total
Res
Work
mJ
[Insp
Res
Work]
+
[Exp
Res
A
Total
System
Work
parameter
Work],
Resistive
Work
Vent
Exp
Vt
mL
Expiratory
volume
as
seen
Ventilators
that
actually
use
corrections
to
by
the
ventilator,
taking
take
into
account
volume
“lost”
in
circuits
into
account
compressible
would
be
expected
to
report
volumes
similar
gas
volumes
in
circuits,
as
to
the
ASL’s
uncompensated
parameter
define3d
in
Auxiliary
(Vtin),
at
BTPS
conditions
Compensation
Parameters
in
the
Breath
Detection
/
RT-‐Analysis
window
Vent
Insp
Vt
mL
Inspiratory
volume
as
Ventilators
that
actually
use
corrections
to
seen
by
the
ventilator,
take
into
account
volume
“lost”
in
circuits
taking
into
account
would
be
expected
to
report
volumes
similar
compressible
gas
volumes
to
the
ASL’s
uncompensated
parameter
in
circuits,
as
defined
in
(Vtex),
at
BTPS
conditions
Auxiliary
Compensation
Parameters
in
Breath
Detection
/
RT-‐Analysis
Vol
1
Peak
mL
Total
Volume
=
Vol1peak
In
a
2-‐compartment
model,
volume
is
+
Vol2peak
distributed
based
on
R
&
C
values
input
into
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
98
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Start
Insp
Index
Vol
Max
Index
Start
Exp
Index
End
Exp
Index
Max
Flow
Acc
(mL/s**2)
Min
Flow
Acc
(mL/s**2)
Oxygen
(%)
Aux
1
(V)
Aux
2
(V)
Time
betw.
Pmin
,
PEEP
(ms)
WOB
betw.
Pmin
,
PEEP
(mJ)
PawTP
ftot
(BPM)
Pmin
PmusTP
PEEP_1
auto
PEEP_2
auto
PEEP_1
tot
PEEP_2
tot
Ext
Insp
Work
Ext
Insp
Elastic
Work
Ext
Insp
Res
Work
Ext
Exp
Work
Ext
Exp
Vent
Work
Ext
Exp
Res
Work
Ext
Exp
Heat
Production
(mJ)
Pmean
Insp
(cmH2O)
Pmean
Exp
(cmH2O)
Pbaro
(kPa)
Ambient
Temp
(C)
Wall
Temp
(C)
PawTP300
(cmH2O*ms)
PawTP500
(cmH2O*ms)
PawTPt
(cmH2O*ms)
Pmean
Ch1
(cmH2O)
Pmean
Ch1
Insp
(cmH2O)
Pmean
Ch1
Exp
(cmH2O)
Pmean
Ch2
(cmH2O)
Pmean
Ch2
Insp
(cmH2O)
Pmean
Ch2
Exp
(cmH2O)
Table
7-‐3:
Breath
Parameter
Data
File
(*.brb,
*.bra)
99
The format of this file i s tab delimited text. Each entry i s 1 2 c haracters wide a nd padded with s paces.
Tracheal
Ventilator
Chamber
1
Chamber
2
Chamber
1
Chamber
2
Pressure
Ventilator
Ventilator
Pressure
Volume
(mL) Volume
(mL) Flow
(L/min) Flow
(L/min) (cmH2O) Volume
(mL) Flow
(L/min) (cmH2O)
Table
7-‐4:
Processed
Waveform
Data
File
(*.dtb,
*.dta)
Chamber
1
Chamber
2
Breath
File
Aux
1
(V) Aux
2
(V) Oxygen
Sensor
Pressure
Pressure
Number
(#) (V)
(cmH2O) (cmH2O)
Table
7-‐5:
Raw
Data
File
(*.rwb,
*.rwa)
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
100
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
101
1 2
3
Figure
8-‐1:
Virtual
Ventilator
in
Pressure
Control
Mode
1. “Dial”
the
respective
parameter
control
knob
(or
enter
a
number
into
the
field
below
the
knob)
to
adjust:
• Breath
Rate
• Inspiratory
Flow
Time
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
102
To
illustrate
use
of
the
VV,
please
follow
along
the
example
below
that
is
used
for
demonstrating
expiratory
dyssynchrony.
• Go
to
the
patient
library
and
select
the
Adult
Normal
patient
model
as
a
starting
point.
• Run
this
model
(start
simulation)
• Observe
Waveforms,
they
should
look
as
follows:
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
8-‐2:
Virtual
Ventilator
Button
on
Run
Time
Home
103
• Next,
activate
the
Virtual
Ventilator
and
set
all
parameters
as
shown
below:
Figure
8-‐3:
Virtual
Ventilator
Settings
for
Exp.
Dyssynchrony
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
104
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
8-‐4:
Virtual
ventilator
Example
-‐
Inspiratory
Time
Mismatch
You
have
created
a
situation
where
the
duration
of
the
patient’s
breath
is
longer
than
the
inspiratory
time
delivered
by
the
ventilator.
The
resolution
to
this
is
increasing
the
inspiratory
time
on
the
Virtual
Ventilator.
• Use
the
virtual
knob
on
the
VV
panel,
and
increase
Insp.Flow
Time
gradually
to
a
value
of
1.5
s.
105
The
waveforms
now
look
as
shown
in
the
screen
below,
where
the
problem
of
expiratory
dyssynchrony
has
been
resolved.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
8-‐5:
Virtual
ventilator
Example
-‐
Inspiratory
Time
Mismatch
Resolved
• On
the
ASL
Virtual
Ventilator
window,
click
to
close
and
exit
the
Virtual
Ventilator
and
return
to
the
simulation
with
only
the
patient’s
spontaneous
breathing.
106
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
• Provide
learners
with
the
patient
status
using
the
vital
signs
monitor
• Capture
data
from
the
ASL
5000
Breathing
Simulator,
a
connected
ventilator
(via
a
Ventilator
Interface
Kit),
and
the
vital
signs
monitor
• Mark
and
annotate
events
• Replay
a
compiled
recording
during
a
debriefing
sessions
or
classroom
instruction
There
are
three
tabs
in
the
RespiSim®
Window
Manager:
• QuickChoice/
Interactive,
a
quick-‐access,
simplified
approach
to
selecting
and
using
a
patient
model,
• Instructor
Dashboard,
a
control
panel
for
multi-‐stage
scenarios
authored
in
the
RespiSim®
environment,
• Debriefing,
a
comprehensive
view
of
data
during
a
simulation
and
for
playback
after
a
simulation
is
completed.
With
the
full
license
in
place,
click
RespiSim®
Window
Manager
in
the
Welcome
window
(see
5.2,
page
30).
RespiSim®
opens
in
the
QuickChoice/
Interactive
tab
view.
107
z.` QuickChoice/Interactive
QuickChoice/Interactive
is
the
preferred
approach
for
an
instructor
who
does
not
have
access
to
or
does
not
need
a
fully
developed
RespiSim®
Curriculum
Module
for
a
simulation
involving
a
patient
suffering
from
a
number
of
different
disease
states.
Notably,
no
specific
numeric
values
for
patient
respiratory
mechanics
need
to
be
entered.
New
Feature
QuickChoice/Interactive
has
been
added
to
RespiSim®
in
Software
3.6
answering
the
frequently
voiced
need
for
a
simplified
approach
for
standard
disease
states.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
9-‐1:
QuickChoice/Interactive
Panel
108
1
2
3
4
Figure
9-‐2:
QuickChoice/Interactive
Patient
Model
Selection
Sequentially,
make
your
selection
of
a
patient
model
from
a
library
that
is
structured
by:
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
1. Patient
Type
2. Diagnosis
3. Disease
Severity
NOTE
The
library
for
these
models
is
separate
from
the
one
that
is
associated
with
the
scenarios
that
you
access
from
either
the
Interactive
tab
or
the
Patient
Script
Editor.
For
details,
please
see
QuickChoice
Patient
Model
Library,
page259.
4. Go
to
Custom
Severity
to
add
any
further
detail
to
disease
severity.
Choices
for
Resistance
and
Compliance
range
from
healthy
to
severe,
with
the
spontaneous
breath
Rate
selections
depending
on
Patient
Type
and
Diagnosis.
You
may
also
cancel
patient
effort
completely
(apneic).
109
6
7
8
5
Figure
9-‐3:
QuickChoice/Interactive
-‐
Activate
5. Click
Activate
Current
Selection
to
enable
Start
Simulation
,
which
will
now
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
110
9
Figure
9-‐4:
QuickChoice/Advanced
Interactive
9. Alternatively,
you
may
select
or
modify
a
patient
model
from
the
Advanced
Interactive
Control
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Panel
(AICP).
Click
Advanced
Interactive
;
the
panel
opens
as
a
separate
window.
111
Figure
9-‐5:
Advanced
Interactive
Control
Panel
Selections
can
be
made
from
this
panel
as
described
in
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
112
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
• Select
the
Instructor
Dashboard
tab
from
the
RespiSim®
Window
Manager
• Click
and
pick
a
RespiSim®
scenario
from
the
file
dialog
box.
If
you
pick
scenario
NIV2000
(Non-‐Invasive
Ventilation
example
included
with
the
RespiSim®
software),
the
Initial
Settings
sub-‐tab
of
the
Instructor
Dashboard
will
look
as
follows:
113
1
4
7
5
8
6
9
3 11 10
2
Figure
9-‐6:
Instructor
Dashboard,
Initial
Settings
1. Control
and
Navigation
Buttons:
Start/stop
a
simulation,
invoke
a
pause
patient
model
as
well
as
navigate
to
other
tabs
and
windows
within
the
ASL
5000
Software,
including:
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
114
4. Current
Module
File
(.xml):
Is
the
file
that
is
currently
loaded
as
the
RespiSim®
scenario.
5. Instructor
Guide
-‐
Provides
step-‐by-‐step
instructions
on
running
the
simulation
to
meet
learning
objectives
(in
PDF
format
for
viewing
or
printing).
6. Preferences
File
(.rsp):
Load
and
access
RespiSim®
preferences.
Customize
the
instructional
environment
to
the
specific
subject
being
taught
(parameters
to
be
displayed,
event
categories,
alarm
categories,
etc.).
7. Steps
per
Change:
Helps
you
define
the
transition
from
one
set
of
patient
model
parameters
to
the
next
(see
also
10.6
Transition
Settings,
page
163).
8. PulseOxim
Settings:
Controls
the
connection
port
for
the
external
SpO2
simulator
(PulseOxim).
9. CO2
Setting:
Controls
CO2
production
of
IngMar
Medical’s
RespiPatient® (mL/min).
10. Launch
RespiScope
opens
the
software
for
controlling
the
stethoscope
simulator
(RespiScope™).
11. lnstructor-‐Driven
Patient
Vitals:
Allows
you
to
set
ABGs,
chest
X-‐rays,
lab
results,
as
well
as
heart
and
lung
sounds
that
can
be
made
available
to
the
student
upon
request.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
115
Additional
tabs
that
cover
subsequent
stages
of
a
simulation
scenario
are
also
structured
in
columns:
4
1
2
3
5 6
Figure
9-‐7:
Instructor
Dashboard,
Change
Event
View
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
1. A
total
of
6
columns
are
provided
for
entering
predefined
scenario
data
representing
patient
states
of
treatment
and
physiological
response.
They
cover
the
typical
attempts
of
learners
to
fix
the
challenges
presented
by
the
particular
change
event
(stage
of
the
scenario).
These
Instructor
Settings
are
usually
(where
applicable)
ordered
in
a
worst-‐to
best-‐lineup
(red
to
green
background),
with
the
optimal
solution
entered
in
the
rightmost
column.
Parameters
of
special
significance
may
be
highlighted
with
a
yellow
background.
2. Right-‐click
on
any
of
the
columns
to
open
a
pop-‐up
window
with
tools
to
copy
and
paste
all
column
entries,
as
well
as
for
highlighting,
and
pneumo
settings
(applicable
when
used
with
RespiPatient).
3. If
Pneumo
Settings
were
enabled,
a
button
for
triggering
a
pneumothorax
will
be
part
of
the
Instructor
Settings
column.
4. Click
any
of
the
Enable
Instructor
Setting
buttons
to
activate
the
respective
column.
5. Activate
sounds
and
auxiliary
information
for
the
Vital
Signs
Monitor
(student
facing
screen)
from
the
row
of
buttons
on
the
bottom
of
the
Instructor
Dashboard
(see
page
117).
6. Click
the
Assessment
button
to
see
a
pop-‐up
that
contains
information
about
the
expected
assessment
at
the
end
of
the
change
event
(stage
of
the
simulation).
116
2
1
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
9-‐8:
Vital
Signs
Monitor
Window
New
Feature
The
Vital
Signs
Monitor
now
features
a
small
scale
duplicate
that
the
instructor
can
place
conveniently
in
a
fixed
location
on
his/her
primary
screen
to
check
that
the
students
see
the
correct
information.
1. Drag
the
main
Vital
Signs
Monitor
window
to
the
desired
location
on
the
secondary,
student-‐
facing
screen
and
click
Save
Position
on
the
main
Vital
Signs
Monitor
window
2. Drag
the
small
Vital
Signs
Monitor
Duplicate
to
a
convenient
location
on
the
primary
(instructor)
screen
and
click
its
button.
When
the
software
is
reopened
later,
these
positions
will
be
reapplied
as
preferred
locations.
117
The
Vital
Signs
Monitor
displays
physiological
data
from
the
Vital
Signs
Values
fields.
Figure
9-‐9:
Vital
Signs
Values
Fields
You
find
this
same
panel
for
data
entry
in:
• The
Interactive
Control
Panel
of
the
Standard
Window
Manager
• The
Advanced
Interactive
Control
Panel
of
the
RespiSim®
Window
Manager
• The
Instructor
Dashboard
Additionally,
the
instructor
can
also
make
X-‐rays,
ABGs,
and
lab
results
available
to
the
student
(see
Figure
9-‐10).
• While
a
simulation
is
running,
click
X-‐ray
and
Display
ABG
in
the
row
of
buttons
at
the
bottom
of
the
Instructor
Dashboard.
These
items
will
then
display
as
part
of
the
Vital
Signs
Monitor
as
shown
below
(when
available
as
part
of
a
RespiSim®
Module).
• Click
Hide
X-‐ray
and
Hide
ABG
to
remove
the
items
from
the
Vital
Signs
Monitor.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
NOTE
Only
one
set
of
numerical
data
can
be
displayed
simultaneously,
either
ABGs
or
lab
results.
118
Figure
9-‐10:
Vital
Signs
Monitor
with
X-‐ray
and
ABGs
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
119
1 4
2 6
3
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
5
Figure
9-‐11:
RespiSim®
Debriefing
Tab
1. Module
inventory:
Displays
the
available
patient
models
created
for
a
RespiSim®
module
(e.g.
NIV2000).
2. Simulation
Control:
• Start/Stop
a
simulation
• Invoke
the
“Pause”
patient
model
• Freeze
the
display
for
review
during
a
simulation
• Choose
between
Waveform,
Loop,
or
Trend
view
3. Navigation
• View
the
currently
running
patient
model
• Open
the
Event
Markers
window
• Open
a
recorded
simulation
for
playback
120
2
1
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
3
4
Figure
9-‐12:
Debriefing,
Playback
Mode
When
in
Playback
Mode,
the
visual
appearance
of
the
left
portion
of
the
window
changes
and
information
about
the
recorded
simulation
is
displayed,
together
with
a
set
of
playback
controls.
1. Click
the
Play
button
to
replay
a
simulation.
121
2. You
may
also
directly
drag
the
green
cursor
in
the
Event
Graph
to
a
spot
that
you
want
to
view.
The
Event
Graph
shows
the
entire
simulation
and
any
documented
changes
from
the
Event
Markers.
3. The
graphs
shown
are
from
the
time
indicated
by
the
cursor
line
in
the
Event
Graph.
4. Numeric
parameters
in
the
Parameter
List
update
automatically
to
reflect
values
at
the
time
indicated
by
the
cursor
line
in
the
Event
Graph.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
9-‐13:
Event
Marker
Window
1. Large
buttons,
pre-‐labeled
for
each
curriculum
module
for
the
instructor
to
mark
events
and
2. color
codes
for
markings
of
the
Event
Graph,
are
predefined.
3. In
addition
to
simply
marking
an
event,
instructors
can
enter
text
to
be
recorded
for
an
event
before
the
event’s
button
is
pressed.
The
text
will
be
cleared
from
the
field
as
the
event
is
recorded.
4. These
indicators
are
lit
for
“latching
events”,
i.e.,
events
that
had
been
defined
to
produce
a
continuous
line
in
the
Event
Graph
for
the
duration
between
subsequent
clicks
of
the
marker
buttons
(activate/deactivate).
When
clicking,
the
corresponding
event
button
color
will
stay
orange
(e.g.
in
our
example).
• Click
Close
Event
Markers
from
the
Instructor
Dashboard
or
the
Debriefing
tab
to
close
the
Event
Marker
window.
122
Figure
9-‐14:
File
Drop-‐Down
Menu
from
Debriefing
The
RespiSim®
Preferences
window
opens
in
the
Module
tab
view.
User’s Manual ASL 5000, SW 3 .6, Rev.1, © IngMar M edical, L td. 2016
Figure
9-‐15:
RespiSim®
Preferences
-‐
Module
Tab
123
In
this
tab,
you
can
define
paths
for
the
module
inventory
support
directory
and
the
Current
Preference
File
Location
itself.
Additionally,
you
will
also
find
a
Module
Description
here.
• Click
the
Load
button
to
load
a
new
preference
set
(configuration).
After
navigating
to
a
support
directory
of
a
curriculum
module,
the
file
path
will
be
indicated
in
the
Current
Preference
File
Location
field.
• Click
the
Event
Graph
tab
to
define
markings
in
the
Event
Graph.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
9-‐16:
RespiSim®
Preferences
-‐
Event
Graph
Tab
Alarm
Events
are
associated
with
alarm
signals
coming
from
a
ventilator
via
the
Ventilator
Interface
Kit.
To
set
up
markings
in
the
Event
Graph
when
specific
ventilator
alarms
occur
during
a
simulation:
• Select
the
parameter
from
the
drop-‐down
menu
in
Alarm
Events.
• Select
the
box
on
the
left
of
the
parameter
name.
• Define
the
color
to
be
used
for
the
markings
by
clicking
on
the
color
swatches
on
the
right
of
the
parameter
field.
The
Scans
marking
is
also
associated
with
the
Ventilator
Interface
Kit.
When
Student
Scan
is
checked,
you
will
receive
a
marking
when
students
have
used
their
interface
device
(iPad
etc.)
for
patient
124
charting,
i.e.,
downloaded
ventilator
information
into
their
chart.
Regular
Auto
Scan
marks
indicate
that
ventilator
data
in
the
simulation
data-‐set
is
up
to
date.
Simulation
Markers
are
set
up
scenario-‐specific
in
the
RespiSim®
Preferences.
They
give
the
instructor
a
means
to
quickly
insert
a
mark
into
the
Event
Graph
with
the
click
of
a
button.
Event
Text
entered
here
in
the
RespiSim®
Preferences
will
make
it
show
up
as
the
default
text
when
the
Event
Marker
window
is
open
during
a
simulation.
This
can
beneficially
be
used
when
a
student’s
verbal
response
needs
to
be
captured,
for
example
as
answer
to
a
question,
or
as
a
dosage
of
medication.
• Click
the
green
button
in
the
Latch?
column
for
any
simulation
marker.
The
clicked
button
lights
up
to
indicate
that
latching
is
ON
(showing
a
line
in
the
Event
Graph
that
signifies
a
duration
rather
than
just
an
event
moment).
To
turn
latching
OFF,
just
click
the
same
button
again.
• Click
the
Parameters
tab
for
setting
up
the
numerical
parameters
in
Debriefing.
User’s Manual ASL 5000, SW 3 .6, Rev.1, © IngMar M edical, L td. 2016
Figure
9-‐17:
RespiSim®
Preferences
-‐
Parameters
Tab
You
can
define
up
to
18
visible
parameters
for
the
RespiSim®
Debriefing
window.
The
colors
of
the
parameter
fields
and
any
scaling
for
Trends
in
the
Debriefing
graphics
area
can
also
be
predefined
from
the
RespiSim®
Preferences.
125
• Click
any
of
the
name
fields
to
see
the
drop-‐down
of
all
available
parameters,
from:
➤
ASL
5000
➤
Ventilator
➤
Vital
Signs
Monitor
• Select
the
appropriate
parameter
option
for
the
position
on
the
left
to
make
it
visible
in
Debriefing.
• Click
the
color
swatch
and
select
a
color
for
the
numerical
field
in
Debriefing
from
the
color
menu
that
opens.
• Click
the
respective
Trend
Scale
field
to
pick
a
gain
factor.
Since
multiple
trends
will
be
displayed
in
the
graphic
of
Debriefing,
it
is
advisable
to
adjust
gain
factors
to
make
even
small
numerical
values
visible
in
the
graph.
within
the
scope
of
the
RespiSim®
system.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
9.8.1 Using
Pre-‐Scripted
Modules
Developed
in
collaboration
with
leading
educators,
preconfigured
RespiSim®
curriculum
modules
save
instructor-‐time
by
providing
a
comprehensive,
multimedia
package
of
materials
that
describes
and
demonstrates
a
concept
or
scenario
within
the
subject
matter
of
mechanical
ventilation.
The
typical
components
of
a
Curriculum
Module
are:
• Scenario
Concept
Presentation
(SCP,
mp4
movie-‐file)
• Instructor
Guide
(IG,
pdf-‐file)
• Patient
Model
File
Inventory
(*.vr3-‐files)
• Support
Files
(sounds,
X-‐rays,
lab
values
in
different
formats)
• Instructor
Actions
and
Assessments
(part
of
the
main
XML-‐file)
.
NOTE
126
The
Scenario
Concept
Presentation
(SCP)
is
not
directly
accessible
from
the
Instructor
Dashboard
since
it
is
not
intended
to
be
used
at
the
time
of
the
simulation
session,
but
rather
as
a
home
study
item.
1. After
starting
the
ASL
5000
software
into
the
RespiSim®
Window
Manager
(see
page
30),
go
to
the
Debriefing
tab
and
click
Start
RespiSim®
.
2. Go
to
the
Instructor
Dashboard
tab.
It
will
be
open
to
the
Initial
Settings
view
(see
page
128).
3. Click
Load
Scenario/Patient
.
4. Navigate
to
the
RespiSim®
Modules
directory
and
load
the
xml-‐file
of
a
RespiSim®
Curriculum
Module
from
the
library
(for
this
example,
we
use
the
included
NIV2000
Module).
Figure
9-‐18:
Navigation
to
RespiSim®
Curriculum
Modules
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
The
Initial
Settings
pane
will
now
look
as
follows:
127
Figure
9-‐19:
Initial
Settings
-‐
NIV2000
5. Click
Display
Instructor
Guide
to
open
the
pdf
of
the
Instructor
Guide
for
the
module.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
128
CASE NAME: RT 2000 NON-INVASIVE POSITIVE REVISION DATE: TARGET DURATION (MIN): 15
PRESSURE VENTILATION (NIPPV) 10/17/2014
This case initially involves a non-intubated, spontaneously breathing patient who is admitted into the ER. On initial
assessment the learner is provided enough information to deduce that the patient most likely has an exacerbation of
COPD. The learner is permitted to initially provide albuterol (and/or ipratropium), increase the FiO2, or request systemic
steroids, however, there is no appreciable improvement in the patient’s acute condition and the learner must initiate non-
invasive ventilation (NIV). Once NIV is initiated the learner must provide an inspiratory pressure of 10 cmH2O to alleviate
the patient’s work of breathing. Once an inspiratory pressure of 10 cmH2O is reached and work of breathing is alleviated,
the learner must assess and correct inadequate oxygenation. The learner will be required to increase the expiratory
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
pressure, but must also increase the inspiratory pressure limit to maintain ventilation. If the learner increases only
expiratory pressure and fails to increase the inspiratory pressure limit coinciding, ventilation will again be compromised
!
LEARNING OBJECTIVES (will become the basis for debriefing questions)
!
Figure
9-‐20:
NIV2000
-‐
Instructor
Guide
6. Click
Initial
Assessment
on
the
Instructor
Dashboard
to
see
the
patient’s
background
information
onscreen.
RespiSim Instructor Guide • Page 1
129
Figure
9-‐21:
NIV2000
-‐
Initial
Assessment
7. Drag
the
Initial
Assessment
window
to
a
convenient
location
and
click
Save
Position
.
The
Assessment
windows
will
now
always
pop
up
in
this
location,
on
the
instructor’s
screen.
8. Since,
in
this
module,
a
supporting
image
exists
(X-‐ray),
click
the
Display
Supporting
Image
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
130
Figure
9-‐22:
NIV2000
-‐
Supporting
X-‐ray
9. Click
Show
on
VSM
Screen
to
move
the
image
to
the
secondary
(Vital
Signs
Monitor,
VSM)
screen,
which
will
make
it
available
to
the
students.
10. When
finished
with
the
pre-‐simulation
briefing
of
the
students,
click
Close
All
on
the
Initial
Assessment
window
to
clear
the
VSM
screen.
11. Click
on
the
X
in
the
top
right
corner
to
close
the
Initial
Assessment
window.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
12. On
the
Initial
Settings
tab
of
the
RespiSim®
Window
Manager,
click
Enable
Initial
Setting
to
make
the
patient
model
and
VSM
parameters
active.
The
button
will
change
to
Initial
Setting
Enabled .
13. Click
Show
Lung
Model
.
You
will
be
able
to
see
the
details
of
the
underlying
patient
model
for
the
initial
stage
of
the
simulation.
131
Figure
9-‐23:
NIV2000
-‐
Initial
Patient
Model
14. Close
this
window
and
click
Show
Instructor
Actions .
A
window
will
reiterate
the
learning
objectives
for
the
initial
assessment.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
9-‐24:
NIV2000
-‐
Initial
Instructor
Actions
15. Finally,
click
Start
Sim.
to
get
the
simulation
started.
You
will
be
asked
for
a
location
for
the
data
set.
Please
note
that
data
sets
saved
from
RespiSim®
always
have
the
“Save
Waveforms”
checked.
16. Click
Event
Markers
to
open
the
window
for
marking
up
your
Debriefing
Event
Graph
and
move
the
window
to
a
convenient
location
on
the
screen
for
ready
access.
132
The
next
step
in
a
simulation
exercise
is
to
move
to
the
next
Change
Event,
which
represents
possibilities
of
student
responses
to
the
first
challenge
of
the
scenario
simulation.
• On
the
Instructor
Dashboard,
click
Change
Event
1
to
see
the
first
set
of
possible
responses.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
9-‐25:
NIV
2000
-‐
Change
Event
1
• After
students
pick
one
of
the
possibilities,
click
the
respective
Enable
Instructor
Setting
button,
which
then
turns
yellow
.
• Click
Show
Instructor
Actions
for
the
column
that
represents
the
students’
choice.
1
Figure
9-‐26:
NIV
2000
-‐
Instructor
Actions
133
• In
the
window
that
opens,
both
the
Change
Event
and
the
Instructor
Setting
are
marked.
The
background
color
(red
to
green)
symbolizes
the
progression
from
problematic
to
optimum.
NOTE
For
a
successful
conclusion
of
a
simulation
stage
(the
Change
Event),
the
instructor
will
always
have
to
ensure
that
the
learner
arrives
at
the
Optimum
Setting,
otherwise
it
would
not
make
sense
to
proceed
with
subsequent
Change
Events.
Use
the
buttons
on
the
Event
Marker
window
for
placing
markers
as
appropriate
while
the
simulation
is
running.
• Click
Assessment
.
Instructions
regarding
what
to
communicate
to
students
will
pop
up.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
9-‐27:
NIV
2000
-‐
Final
Assessment
•
Advance
to
Change
Event
2
on
the
Instructor
Dashboard
and
activate
the
leftmost
Instructor
Settings
column.
The
button
will
change
color:
In
the
same
fashion
as
described
above,
proceed
through
the
steps
for
Change
Event
2.
This
is
the
last
stage
for
this
simulation
(NIV2000).
When
finished,
• Click
Stop
Sim.
to
end
the
session.
134
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
9-‐28:
NIV
2000
-‐
Debriefing
• Observe
the
location
of
the
markers
that
were
set
previously.
• The
vital
parameter
SpO2
change
informed
by
the
Instructor
Settings
that
were
chosen
on
the
Instructor
dashboard
during
the
simulation.
• The
height
of
the
yellow
lines
for
individual
breaths
represent
tidal
volumes.
• The
stepwise
increase
of
PEEP
in
the
simulation
is
also
reflected
in
the
Volume
plot.
As
you
go
to
different
times
in
the
simulation,
the
volume
plots
look
like
this:
Figure
9-‐29:
Volume
Plots
with
Spont.
Breathing,
2
Levels
of
PEEP
135
• Click
on
the
down
arrow
to
pull
open
the
Event
Graph
to
view
more
details.
Hovering
over
individual
marker
entries
shows
the
associated
text
and
a
time
stamp.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
136
As
stated
earlier,
the
strategy
is
to
support
a
learner
to
arrive
at
optimal
settings
based
on
the
challenge
presented
in
the
module.
The
learner
is
expected
to
make
ventilator
adjustments
based
on
feedback
from
the
patient
model
and
vital
signals.
The
instructor
can
then
enable
new
patient
models
(in
a
Change
Event
tab).
For
a
more
complex
simulation,
the
instructor/author
can
populate
new
Change
Event
tabs
with
changing
patient
models
and
associated
vitals.
Next,
the
topics
ahead
describe
the
use
of
important
elements
in
the
creation
of
custom
modules.
9.9.1 Instructor
Guide
An
Instructor
Guide
Template
and
Authoring
Guide
are
included
in
the
RespiSim®
software
distribution
(installed
into
..\documentation)
to
guide
the
instructor
must
take
for
the
preparation
of
RespiSim®
modules.
The
Instructor
Guide
must
provide
the
following
elements:
• General
Scenario
Information:
Information
about
the
module,
developer,
intended
learners.
• Case
Description:
Summary
of
the
background
of
the
patient
and
the
environment
for
the
upcoming
simulation.
• Learning
Objectives:
A
listing
of
the
objectives
expected
to
be
achieved
by
the
learners.
• Scenario
Overview:
Includes
the
Initial
Assessment
and
Change
Events
to
be
used.
• Patient
Information
and
History:
Details
about
age,
setting,
history,
vitals,
labs,
etc.
• Initial
Assessment:
Detailed
assessment
and
files
used
in
the
simulation
in
the
Initial
Settings
tab.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
• Change
Events:
Breakdown
of
each
Instructor
Setting
group
within
a
given
Change
Event.
This
covers
vent
reference
settings,
lung
models
to
use,
vitals,
etc.
• Debriefing
Planning
and
Questions:
• Information
on
preparing
for
the
debrief
session,
questions
to
be
asked
at
the
conclusion
of
the
simulation
and
during
debrief.
9.9.2 Instructor
Settings
Columns
The
Change
Event
tabs
encompass
several
Instructor
Settings
columns
which
hold
the
characteristics
of
each
step
of
a
patient
scenario.
>>Always
start
with
the
Initial
Settings
tab.
In
the
four
additional
Change
Event
tabs,
each
column
can
be
populated
based
on
the
module
being
created.
The
instructor/author
is
expected
to
fill
each
column
that
is
going
to
be
used
as
a
potential
state
with
the
following
information
pertaining
to
the
scenario:
• Patient
model
• Vent
reference
settings
(the
ventilator
settings
expected
for
a
particular
state
of
the
simulation)
• Vital
signs
137
• ABG
values
• Instructor
actions
You
will
not
always
use
all
Instructor
Settings
offered
in
a
Change
Event.
Unused
columns
will
be
covered
up
when
re-‐calling
the
scenario
later.
1
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
9-‐31:
Change
Event
-‐
Vent
Reference
Settings
• Enter
baseline
settings
into
the
leftmost
column
that
reflect
the
conditions
at
the
onset
or
discovery
of
the
problem/challenge.
• Create
different
treatment
pathways
(vent
settings)
that
a
learner
may
choose
to
manage
the
patient
status.
As
you
move
from
left
to
right
,
provide
the
least
optimal
to
the
most
optimal
treatment
decision
(vent
settings)
and
how
the
patient’s
body
would
react
to
these
changes
(vitals
and/or
ABG
values).
It
is
in
selecting
these
settings
that
the
instructor/author’s
clinical
experience
and
knowledge
is
critical
for
creating
a
meaningful
and
authentic
learning
experience.
• Create
a
patient
model
that
corresponds
to
the
respiratory
mechanics
of
the
disease
state
of
the
patient
and
reflects
the
spontaneous
breathing
pattern
while
under
treatment.
• Enter
vitals
and
ABG
values
that
match
the
expected
patient
response
based
on
your
clinical
expertise.
138
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
9-‐32:
Instructor
Setting
Editing
Features
2. Click
Enable/Disable
Highlighting
and
the
Parameter
Highlight
Configuration
window
will
display.
139
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
9-‐33:
Parameter
Highlight
Configuration
9.9.4 Instructor
Actions
You
can
enter
information
into
the
Show
Instructor
Actions
windows
for
all
settings
columns
and
Change
Events.
The
information
in
each
Instructor
Actions
window
should
be
based
on
the
choices
made
by
the
learner.
This
is
where
the
instructor
or
physician
can
agree
or
disagree
with
a
treatment
choice
made
by
the
learner
and
provide
corrective
suggestions.
A
second
purpose
of
comments
entered
here
is
to
help
instructors
guide/coach
themselves
too.
140
• In
any
Instructor
Setting
column
in
a
Change
Event
panel,
click
Show
Instructor
Actions
.
Figure
9-‐34:
Instructor
Actions
Example
• Edit
text
as
needed
directly
into
the
window.
• Click
Close
to
return
to
the
Change
Event
panel.
NOTE
Edits
are
not
saved
immediately.
They
become
permanent
only
after
the
whole
module
is
saved
from
the
Initial
Settings
tab.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
9.9.5 Patient
Models
Patient
models
(*.vr3
files)
can
be
designed
to
include
various
compliance,
resistance,
and
effort
settings
that
represent
the
diseased
or
improving
states
of
a
patient
while
on
the
ventilator.
Patient
models
may
be:
• Passive
and
only
respond
to
the
ventilator,
or
• Spontaneously
breathing,
thus
requiring
synchrony
in
the
ventilator
settings.
These
models
can
be
put
into
the
Instructor
settings
columns
on
the
Instructor
Dashboard
to
represent
the
advancement
of
a
patient’s
condition
from
the
stage
of
initial
challenge
to
the
final
assessment
(improved
state).
To
add
a
patient
model
to
the
simulation,
• Click
the
folder
icon
at
the
top
of
each
Instructor
Setting
column
on
a
Change
Event
panel
(see
Figure
9-‐25).
• Navigate
to
a
prepared
patient
model
and
click
to
select.
141
The
instructor
should
develop
each
patient
model
before
creating
the
RespiSim®
module.
This
may
also
be
done
in
the
Standalone
Mode
of
the
ASL
5000
software,
without
the
actual
simulator
attached.
Patient
models
can
be
designed
and
placed
anywhere
on
a
computer,
but
it
is
recommended
to
keep
all
*.vr3
files
within
a
directory
that
will
be
used
as
a
general
repository
for
model
files.
NOTE
It
is
recommended
to
always
start
with
the
Initial
Settings
tab
as
the
first
state
of
the
patient.
You
can
always
use
Show
Lung
Model
to
view
details
of
the
patient
model
(see
Figure
7-‐18:
Current
Patient
Model
Summary,
page
63).
9.9.6 Lung
and
Heart
Sounds
RespiSim®
provides
two
methods
for
working
with
lung
and
heart
sounds:
• The
first
(conventional)
method
is
to
add
sounds
for
playback
from
the
PC’s
speaker.
• The
second
(advanced)
method
uses
the
IngMar
Medical
RespiPatient®
in
combination
with
a
RespiScope™
auscultation
simulator.
For
the
conventional
method,
1. Right-‐click
on
Lung
Sounds
or
Heart
Sounds
from
any
Change
Event
view
and
the
View/Edit
Lung
Sounds
or
View/Edit
Heart
Sounds
window,
open
respectively.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
9-‐35:
View/Edit
Lung
Sounds
Window
2. Click
the
folder
icon
to
navigate
to
the
appropriate
sound
file.
Formats
accepted
are
*.wav
or
*.au.
142
3. Type
directly
into
the
Lung
Sounds
Description
field
to
describe
the
sounds.
4. Click
Display
to
make
the
description
of
the
sound
visible
on
the
Vital
Signs
Monitor
window
for
the
students.
5. Preview
the
sound
directly
from
the
View/Edit
window
by
clicking
the
Play
button
inside
the
WindowsMediaPlayer,
or
by
clicking
the
Play
Sound
button
.
6. Click
OK
to
close
this
window.
During
a
simulation,
you
can
click
Lung
Sounds
or
Heart
Sounds
on
a
Change
Event
panel
at
any
time
to
hear
the
sound.
The
computer
running
the
simulation
will
need
to
have
the
volume
and
speakers
ON
to
hear
these
sounds.
NOTE
It
may
help
to
have
external
speakers
when
using
this
option
and
projecting
sound
to
a
larger
group.
The
second—advanced—method
of
producing
sounds
for
learners
during
a
simulation
is
through
IngMar
Medical’s
RespiScope™
software.
With
it,
you
can
select
realistic
sounds
for
nine
different
lung,
heart,
and
bowel
regions
on
the
RespiPatient®
manikin
that
the
learner
can
listen
to
via
the
SimScope™
stethoscope,
an
auscultation
simulator.
RespiScope™
software
saves
specific
sound
configurations
to
a
playlist
file
(*.car),
that
assigns
sounds
to
the
nine
listening
regions
of
the
RespiPatient®
manikin.
User’s Manual ASL 5000, SW 3 .6, Rev.1, © IngMar M edical, L td. 2016
Figure
9-‐36:
View/Edit
Lung
Sounds
With
RespiScope™
143
• Click
the
folder
icon
,
and
select
the
*.car-‐file
(instead
of
loading
a
*.wav
file)
for
use
during
the
simulation.
• Click
to
edit
the
RespiScope™
sound
file,
>
the
RespiScope
Sounds
Editor
interface
opens.
You
can
also
open
the
RespiScope™
software
from
the
Initial
Settings
tab
of
the
Instructor
Dashboard:
•
Click
Launch
RespiScope
.
To
learn
more
about
using
the
RespiScope™
software,
please
see
the
RespiPatient®
manual.
9.9.7 Chest
X-‐ray
Upload
chest
X-‐rays
from
your
EMR
system/archives
as
additional
information
on
patient
status.
They
will
typically
be
shown
upon
learners’
request
or
as
an
initial
briefing
on
the
patient
at
hand.
X-‐rays
display
in
the
Vital
Signs
Monitor
screen.
The
RespiSim®
software
can
use
two
image
sizes
based
on
instructor
preference:
• Large
X-‐ray
–
600
x
600
pixels
• Small
X-‐ray
–
300
x
400
pixels
New
Feature
Images
you
may
have
selected
that
do
not
conform
to
these
dimensions
will
be
automatically
scaled
with
black
margins
to
adjust
aspect
ratio,
but
they
will
not
be
cropped.
No
manual
resizing
is
necessary.
• Right-‐click
X-‐ray
from
any
Change
Event
view
>
the
View/Edit
X-‐ray
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
144
Figure
9-‐37:
View/Edit
X-‐ray
• Select
either
the
Large
X-‐ray
or
Small
X-‐ray
option
button,
depending
on
the
format
you
want
to
assign.
You
can
use
the
same
X-‐ray
image
for
both
formats
or
assign
separate
ones.
• Click
the
folder
icon
to
open
the
navigation
window
and
find
the
location
where
the
image
is
stored.
Select
the
file
and
return
to
the
View/Edit
X-‐ray
window.
The
small
image
will
be
attached
to
the
side
of
the
Vital
Signs
Monitor.
User’s Manual ASL 5000, SW 3 .6, Rev.1, © IngMar M edical, L td. 2016
Figure
9-‐38:
Small
X-‐ray
The
large
X-‐ray
will
be
overlaid
over
the
Vital
Signs
Monitor.
145
Figure
9-‐39:
Large
X-‐ray
• Click
to
close
the
View/Edit
X-‐ray
window.
During
a
simulation,
you
can
click
or
on
a
Change
Event
panel
at
any
time
to
toggle
between
the
visible
and
hidden
display
modes
for
X-‐rays.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
NOTE
In
case
the
VSM
window
was
closed
when
you
activate
X-‐ray,
it
will
be
opened
automatically.
9.9.8 Lab
Results
Lab
results
in
RespSim
curriculum
modules
help
learners
to
use
the
results
of
laboratory
tests
when
managing
mechanical
ventilation.
To
prepare
a
text
file
to
be
used
as
lab
results
file
follow
these
simple
steps:
• Open
a
simple
text
editing
application
like
Notepad
on
your
Windows-‐based
computer
provided.
• Type
the
lab
test
name
on
the
left
(i.e.
BUN)
and
then
click
the
tab
button
on
the
keyboard
once.
• Type
the
numerical
value
with
correct
units
(i.e.
21
mg/dL).
• Click
the
Enter/
Return
button
on
the
keyboard
to
add
another
lab
result.
• Save
the
lab
results
as
a
*.txt
file.
(i.e.
NIV2000labresults.txt)
in
the
module’s
support
files
directory.
146
To
assign
lab
results
files
to
simulation
exercises:
• Right-‐click
on
Lab
Results
from
any
Change
Event
view
>
the
View/Modify
Lab
Results
window
opens.
Figure
9-‐40:
View/Edit
Lab
Results
• Click
the
folder
icon
to
open
the
navigation
window
and
find
the
location
where
the
lab
results
text
file
is
stored.
Select
the
file
and
then
return
to
the
View/Edit
X-‐ray
window.
• Click
the
Display
button
to
make
Lab
Results
visible
for
the
students
on
the
Vital
Signs
Monitor
window.
User’s Manual ASL 5000, SW 3 .6, Rev.1, © IngMar M edical, L td. 2016
Figure
9-‐41:
Vital
Signs
Monitor
-‐
Lab
Results
147
If
the
VSM
window
is
closed
when
you
activate
Lab
Results,
it
will
be
opened
automatically
when
you
activate
Lab
Results.
9.9.9 Arterial
Blood
Gas
Values
1. ABG
values
are
entered
directly
into
each
settings
column
within
the
Instructor
Dashboard
Change
Events.
When
a
simulation
is
running,
the
ABG
values
from
the
column
that
is
enabled
are
displayed.
2. To
show
ABG
values
in
the
Vital
Signs
Monitor
window
upon
a
learner’s
request,
click
Display
ABG
.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
1
2
Figure
9-‐42:
Display
ABG
Values
from
Instructor
Dashboard
148
9.9.10
Instructor
Dashboard
Real
Time
Parameters
You
may
customize
modules
by
selecting
up
to
six
parameters
(ASL,
Vent,
or
Vital)
that
will
be
visible
to
instructors
on
the
Instructor
Dashboard.
Select
parameters
that
are
crucial
to
the
progression
of
the
specific
simulation.
For
example,
if
a
learner
decides
to
initiate
a
lung
protective
strategy
(LPS)
on
the
ventilator
(decrease
Vt,
increase
RR),
the
instructor
may
want
to
have
visual
feedback
of
those
setting
changes
(using
either
the
’ASL’
or
’Vent’
parameters)
in
order
to
know
when
to
activate
the
patient
model
appropriate
for
the
LPS.
These
parameters
are
intended
to
assist
an
instructor
who
may
not
be
present
in
the
simulation
room
or
have
a
direct
view
of
the
changes
being
made
on
the
ventilator.
1 User’s Manual ASL 5000, SW 3 .6, Rev.1, © IngMar M edical, L td. 2016
Figure
9-‐43:
Instructor
Dashboard
Real
Time
Parameters
1. Click
a
parameter
name
(default
is
(ASL)
Breath
Number)
to
open
the
drop-‐down
for
all
available
breath
parameters.
Select
the
desired
parameter
and
proceed
in
the
same
fashion
for
all
6
available
parameter
fields.
149
NOTE
The
selections
will
be
saved
together
with
other
settings
and
content
in
the
module’s
xml-‐file
and
are
independent
from
the
parameter
selection
for
Debriefing,
which
is
managed
by
the
Preferences
file
(*.rsp-‐file)
9.9.11
Saving
RespiSim™
Modules
A
module,
when
finished,
comprises
several
files.
The
main
module
file
is
an
XML-‐file
that
contains
information
about
the
structure
of
the
module,
instructor
actions,
file
locations,
etc.
This
is
the
file
that
you
will
load
if
the
model
is
going
to
be
used
later,
for
example
trigdys.xml.
In
addition,
saving
a
module
creates
a
support
file
directory
of
the
same
name
as
the
xml-‐file.
This
is
where
all
other
files
that
belong
to
the
module,
such
as
sound
files,
X-‐rays,
patient
models,
lab
results,
are
placed.
In
this
example
it
is—trigdys
support
files.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
9-‐44:
RespiSim®
Module
File
Directories
Frequently,
you
may
want
to
link
to
supporting
files
that
are
kept
in
other
locations,
for
example
to
X-‐
ray
images
in
a
larger
X-‐ray
repository.
RespiSim®
will
place
copies
of
those
files
into
the
support
file
directory
of
your
new
module
automatically
for
you.
NOTE
When
you
move
a
whole
module
file
directory
including
its
support
file
directory
to
a
new
location,
the
file
links
might
become
“broken”.
This
might
happen
when
you
place
modules
from
an
earlier
installation
of
the
ASL
5000
Software
into
the
new
location
(3.5
becomes
3.6,
but
the
file
reference
is
still
to
3.5,
see
Figure
9-‐45).
150
Figure
9-‐45:
Support
File
Notification
The
feature
of
automatically
recreating
a
support
file
directory
can
be
used
to
easily
move
a
module.
1. Only
move
the
xml-‐file
(the
“module
file”)
to
the
new
location
(instead
of
moving
all
the
files)
or
2. Copy
the
whole
module
directory
(xml-‐file,
concept
presentation
mp4-‐file,
support
file
directory)
to
the
new
location,
without
deleting
the
files
in
the
old
location.
3. Save
the
module.
NOTE
To
use
this
technique,
it
is
important
that
the
support
files
still
exist
in
the
original
location.
After
you
saved
the
module
(and
copies
were
made
in
the
new
location),
you
can
safely
delete
the
old
module.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
CAUTION!
Simulation
Concept
Presentations
are
not
part
of
the
automatic
process
of
recreating
a
support
directory
and
need
to
be
moved
manually
(unless
you
copied
the
whole
directory
from
the
old
location).
151
Preferences
for
the
RespiSim®
environment
are
separately
covered
in
9.7
RespiSim®
Preferences,
page
123.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
10-‐1:
Welcome
Window
-‐
User
Settings
Selection
You
can
also
access
the
ASL
User
Settings
from
all
tabs
of
the
Standard
Window
Manager
or
the
RespiSim®
Window
Manager
by
clicking
the
Help/Customize
menu
item.
152
Figure
10-‐2:
Help/Customize
-‐
User
Settings
On
the
ASL
User
Settings
window
that
opens,
there
are
separate
tabs
for
all
the
types
of
customization
you
can
perform.
The
ASL
5000
stores
these
settings
in
a
Project
File.
User’s Manual ASL 5000, SW 3 .6, Rev.1, © IngMar M edical, L td. 2016
Figure
10-‐3:
ASL
User
Settings
Window
Connection
Settings
include:
• Output
Data
Settings
• Appearance/General
Settings
153
Figure
10-‐4:
ASL
User
Settings
Files
in
ASL
User
Settings
Window
the
USB
(serial
connection).
For
the
physical
connections,
please
refer
to
4.1
Electrical
Connections,
page
20.
The
ASL
5000
Connection
Type,
as
default,
will
be
showing
“Ethernet”
in
the
Connections
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Settings
tab.
10.2.1 Ethernet
Connection
The
preferred
method
of
connection
is
wired
Ethernet.
A
wireless
connection
is
possible
using
the
supplied
router
(which
then
has
a
wired
connection
to
the
ASL
5000).
See
Figure
4-‐2
on
page
21
for
this
setup.
The
router
creates
its
own
network
and
issues
IP
addresses
to
each
device
on
the
network,
(the
ASL
5000
and
the
PC).
This
service
is
called
DHCP
and
is
the
default
setting.
You
then
select
the
connection
to
the
ASL
5000
by
its
ID,
i.e.,
ASL_xxxx
where
xxxx
is
the
serial
number
of
the
ASL
5000.
On
the
Connection
Settings
tab
of
the
User
Settings
window
(see
Figure
10-‐3):
• Verify
that
the
Use
ASL
Identification
Number
option
button
is
checked.
• Enter
the
serial
number
of
the
ASL
5000.
In
the
example
pictured
it
is
1000.
154
Sometimes,
you
might
be
required
by
your
IT-‐department
to
give
the
ASL
5000
a
specific,
fixed
IP
address.
In
this
case,
• Click
the
Use
IP
Address
option
button.
The
Connection
Settings
tab
will
then
appear
as
follows.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
10-‐5:
Connection
Settings
-‐
Fixed
IP
Address
• Enter
the
full
IP
address
into
the
IP
Address
fields.
(IP
addresses
are
always
a
set
of
four
numbers
with
a
maximum
of
3
digits
each,
separated
by
periods.)
NOTE
Before
you
can
connect
to
an
ASL
5000
via
a
fixed
IP
address,
it
itself
first
needs
to
be
set
up
with
this
address.
Please
refer
to
the
Maintenance
section
of
this
manual
for
the
proper
procedure.
155
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
10-‐6:
Connection
Settings
-‐
COM1
156
• Click
the
folder
icon
to
change
the
ASL
5000
Output
File
Path.
• The
file
selection
dialog
box
opens.
Navigate
to
the
desired
location
(file
folder)
and
click
Select
Folder .
All
files
in
the
output
data
set
will
now
will
be
assigned
the
name
you
chose,
with
the
different
extensions
for
each
file
type.
The
ASL
5000
Report
Header
Information
applies
to
reports
generated
from
the
Run
Time
Home
panel
(see
page
45).
• Type
new
text
directly
into
the
field
for
ASL
5000
Report
Header
Information
to
replace
the
default
text
ASL5000
Software.
User’s Manual ASL 5000, SW 3 .6, Rev.1, © IngMar M edical, L td. 2016
Figure
10-‐7:
Output
Data
Settings
157
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
10-‐8:
Appearance/General
Settings
1. To
change
a
color,
click
on
the
plot
sample
and
make
your
selection
from
the
Color
menu
item.
NOTE
Other
plot
attributes,
such
as
Line
Style
or
Line
Width
will
not
be
preserved
in
the
ASL
User
Settings,
but
can
be
set
for
an
individual
plot
in
a
specific
graph.
“Notes:”
is
intended
to
keep
information
about
the
ASL
User
Settings
configuration
(the
profile).
2. To
enter
your
notes,
type
directly
into
the
Notes:
field.
158
In
the
Window
Managers’
menu
bar,
you
also
find
a
menu
item
for
customizing
graph
colors.
Figure
10-‐9:
Help/Customize
–
Graph
Colors
3. Click
Graph
Colors.
The
Customize
Graph
Colors
opens:
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
10-‐10:
Customize
Graph
Colors
To
change
a
color,
click
the
plot
sample
and
make
your
selection
from
the
Color
menu
item
(see
Figure
10-‐8).
4. Click
Apply
if
you
want
to
use
the
new
color
scheme
immediately.
5. Click
Save
to
Project
File
if
you
want
to
permanently
save
the
new
color
scheme
in
ASL
User
Settings
with
a
user
profile.
6. Click
IngMar
Default
Colors
to
revert
to
the
default
color
scheme.
7. Click
Finish
to
finish
and
close
the
window.
159
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
10-‐11:
Script
Editor
Preferences
160
Scenario
Scripts
Library
is
the
directory
that
you
want
assigned
to
your
Scenario
Scripts
upon
start
of
the
software
(see
7.3.1,
Scenario
Scripts
on
page
55).
It
is
C:\Program
Files
(x86)\ASL
Software
3.6\vars\Scenarios
by
default.
• Click
the
folder
icon
to
define
the
new
file
path
for
the
Scenario
Scripts
Library.
• The
file
selection
dialog
box
opens.
Navigate
to
the
desired
location
(file
folder)
and
click
Select
Folder
.
Click
Launch
Relative
Path
Configuration
Tool
to
open
the
Relative
Paths
Configuration
Tool
window.
Figure
10-‐12:
Relative
Path
Configuration
Tool
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
The
table
of
Configured
Relative
Paths
will
always
have
two
entries
by
default:
<ASLVarsDirectory>
C:\Program
Files
(x86)\ASL
Software
3.6\vars
<ASLDefaultInstallDir>
C:\Program
Files
(x86)\ASL
Software
3.6.
NOTE
Both
of
these
tokens/entries
and
their
definitions
are
protected
and
cannot
be
changed
by
the
user.
Click
an
entry
and
click
Edit
to
open
a
window
for
assigning
a
token
name
to
an
actual
path
(or
segment
of
a
path).
161
Figure
10-‐13:
Add/Edit
Relative
Path
• Click
the
folder
icon
to
define
the
actual
file
path
for
which
the
token
will
be
the
symbol.
• The
file
selection
dialog
box
opens.
Navigate
to
the
desired
location
(file
folder)
and
click
Select
Folder
.
• Type
the
name
for
the
shortcut
in
the
Token:
field.
• Click
OK
to
accept
the
choices
and
to
close
the
window.
• For
adding
a
token,
start
with
in
the
Relative
Path
Configuration
Tool
and
proceed
in
the
same
fashion.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
• Click
Done
on
the
Relative
Path
Configuration
Tool
when
finished
with
assigning
tokens.
162
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
10-‐14:
Transition
Settings
Steps
Per
Change
are
set
independently
for
Interactive
Mode
(applies
both
to
the
Standard
Window
Manager
and
in
the
RespiSim®
Window
Manager
Interactive
Control)
and
simulations
controlled
from
the
Instructor
Dashboard
(RespiSim).
You
have
four
settings
available,
Immediate,
3,
6,
and
12
steps
(breaths)
to
fully
transition
to
a
new
setting.
Multiple
parameters
can
change
simultaneously.
If,
in
Interactive
Mode,
an
additional
change
is
requested
while
the
system
is
still
responding
to
a
previous
one,
the
state
the
patient
model
is
in
at
the
time
the
new
change
was
requested
will
serve
as
new
starting
point,
and
it
will
again
take
the
predefined
number
of
steps
for
the
transition.
163
The
locations
where
you
can
adjust
Steps
per
Change
locally
are
highlighted
in
the
below
images:
Figure
10-‐15:
Steps
per
Change
Locations
NOTE
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Here,
Interactive
Mode
rules
implies
that
the
setting
you
fixed
for
Steps
per
Change
in
Interactive
Mode
takes
precedence
over
the
setting
for
RespiSim,
as
long
as
Interactive
Mode
is
activated.
164
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
1
Figure
10-‐16:
Default
Analysis
Parameters
Settings
165
1
2
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
10-‐17:
Virtual
Ventilator
Settings
1. To
make
a
change,
directly
type
the
new
value
into
one
of
the
fields
provided.
2. Settings
for
the
four
modes
possible
in
the
Virtual
Ventilator
are
number
coded:
• 1
=
PC-‐CMV
(Pressure
Control
–
Controlled
Mandatory
Ventilation),
no
patient
trigger
• 2
=
PC-‐CMV
(Pressure
Control
–
Controlled
Mandatory
Ventilation),
with
patient
trigger
• 3
=
VC-‐CMV
(Volume
Control
–
Controlled
Mandatory
Ventilation),
no
patient
trigger
• 4
=
VC-‐CMV
(Volume
Control
–
Controlled
Mandatory
Ventilation),
with
patient
trigger
The
Vent
Resistance
and
Compliance
settings
normally
should
not
be
adjusted/modified
from
their
defaults.
166
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
3. The
values
for
R1
and
R2,
the
respective
bronchial
resistors
leading
to
compartments
1
and
2
(with
the
additional,
independent
values
R1out
and
R2out
(for
independent
setting
of
resistance
during
expiration).
4. The
values
for
C1
and
C2,
i.e.
the
respective
compliances
of
compartments
1
and
2.
1
200
mL
is
the
value
of
the
home
position
volume
that
is
always
maintained
as
a
safety
zone
against
any
piston-‐
overruns
at
the
forward
position.
This
value
is
only
25
mL
when
using
the
Preemie
Cylinder
add-‐on
option.
167
NOTE
As
a
rule,
you
should
try
to
keep
the
complexity
of
the
models
low
and
only
use
two-‐
compartment
models
when
there
is
a
specific
reason
(for
example,
a
pneumothorax
simulation).
A
fully
featured
linear
lung
model
will
look
as
follows
in
Step
2
of
the
patient
model
creation
process:
1
2
3
5
4
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
2
Figure
11-‐1:
Two-‐Compartment
Linear
Patient
Model
(1)
1. URC
(independent
of
a
real
patient’s
FRC
values):
Functional
Residual
Capacity
or
FRC
of
adult
patients
might
be
considerably
larger
than
what
is
allowed
as
the
largest
setting
for
URC
in
the
ASL
5000,
i.e.,
1.5
L.
Since
calculations
for
model
response
do
not,
however,
depend
on
the
size
of
residual
capacity,
a
value
for
URC
may
be
chosen
that
is
independent
of
a
real
patient’s
FRC
values.
168
% #&$#
capacity
(Vt+URC+0.2L
<
3L
is
required).
NOTE
As
long
as
the
Compensations
switch
has
not
been
set
to
ON,
the
compressibility
of
this
volume
will
add
“parasitary”
compliance.
(See
also
"Advanced
Model
Settings
-‐
Compensations"
below.)
! "##$
2. Tracheal
Resistor
Rt:
The
different
modes
for
this
resistor
adhere
to
these
definitions:
• A
linear
resistor
value
is
defined
by
a
simple
proportionality
between
pressure
and
flow
of
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
the
type
%
#
P=
R
x
Flow
,
where
units
of
R
are
usually
given
as
L/s.
• A
parabolic
resistor,
on
the
other
hand,
is
defined
by
a
k-‐value
that
originates
in
the
F1100
ANSI
standard
and
the
following
relationship
between
pressure
and
flow:
k
Flow2,
again,
flow
being
measured
in
L/s.
P
=
• In
the
mixed
case,
the
linear
relationship
is
used
for
low
flows/pressures
and
the
parabolic
for
the
higher
pressures.
The
transition
"##$
! occurs
at
the
point
where
resistance
calculated
as
parabolic
exceeds
linear
resistance
(see
Figure
11.3
on
the
next
page).
The
rationale
for
this
is
that
the
linear
approach
for
low
pressures
avoids
a
particular
effect
that
occurs
around
zero
pressure.
Here,
even
the
slightest
change
in
pressure
would
be
associated
with
a
significant
flow
change,
because
of
the
shape
of
the
parabolic
curve.
169
Figure
11-‐3:
Pressure/Flow
Relationship
for
Different
Resistor
Types
3. Lung
(alveolar)
Resistors
R1
and
R2:
These
resistors
only
exist
as
linear
resistors,
since
flow
in
the
alveolar
lung
vessels
can
be
assumed
to
be
laminar.
Their
pressure/flow
relationship
follows
the
same
formula
as
described
for
the
linear
Rt
above.
4. You
can
elect
to
make
all
resistors
dependent
on
flow
direction,
i.e.,
select
independent
values
for
inspiration
and
expiration.
For
example,
in
cases
of
asthma,
a
patient
is
likely
to
exhibit
a
more
restricted
air
flow
during
expiration.
5. Compliances
C1
and
C2:
Compliances,
in
the
modeling
for
the
ASL
5000,
are
always
considered
compound
compliances
that
include
both
the
effects
of
lung
elasticity
as
well
as
those
of
the
chest
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
170
6 8
7
Figure
11-‐4:
Two-‐Compartment
Linear
Patient
Model
(2)
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
6. Compensations:
When
building
a
patient
model,
you
will
use
compensations
as
a
way
to
arrive
at
the
exact
specified
respiratory
mechanics
for
the
overall
system
in
the
presence
of
parasitary
compliances
and
resistances.
If,
for
example,
compliance
of
the
patient
circuit
should
be
taken
into
consideration
and
the
overall
compliance
(what
the
ventilator
“sees”)
should
be
exactly
the
nominal
value,
switch
Compensations
ON
and
enter
the
additional
volume
of
the
circuit
into
the
field
Vtubing
(L).
7. The
Waveform
Sampling
Rate
(Hz)
selection
allows
you
to
specify
how
many
data
points
per
second
you
would
like
when
capturing
waveforms.
Choices
are
512
(default),
256,
128,
and
64
and
not
always
is
the
high
resolution
of
the
default
setting
necessary.
Especially
when
capturing
long
simulations,
choosing
a
lower
resolution
in
the
time
domain
will
keep
data
file
sets
more
manageable
in
size.
171
Internally,
the
ASL
5000
patient
models
are
always
interpreted
as
two-‐compartment
models.
When
you
select
a
one-‐compartment
model,
it
is
implemented
as
two
compartments
with
exactly
the
same
features.
When
choosing
non-‐linear
compliance,
you
can
still
opt
for
this
configuration
by
clicking
the
C1=C2
checkbox.
• To
open
the
Non-‐Linear
Compliance
Editor
window,
click
Edit
C1
or
Edit
C2 .
.
3
1
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
2
Figure
11-‐5:
Non-‐Linear
Compliance
Editor
You
can
directly
drag
points
and
intercept
lines
with
your
mouse
pointer
in
the
graphical
representation
or
enter
numbers
into
the
columns
on
the
right.
The
graph
shows
the
full
range
of
pressures
for
which
you
have
defined
a
volume
response
in
the
lung
compartment.
172
NOTE
In
order
to
avoid
unpredictable
results,
you
must
define
the
relationship
for
the
whole
range
of
pressures
that
are
expected
to
occur
when
using
this
patient
model,
0
to
40
cmH2O
in
the
example.
Please
keep
in
mind
that
you
will
always
see
the
volume
for
one
compartment
only
on
the
left
of
the
graph.
With
C1=C2
checked
before
entering
the
Non-‐Linear
Compliance
Editor,
an
additional
legend
Total
Volume
Both
Compartments
(L)
will
show
on
the
right
of
the
graph.
1. The
curve
is
linear
between
the
two
horizontal
intercept
lines.
2. Nominal
Compliance
is
a
value
that
is
determined
as
the
linear
compliance
equivalent;
it
is
the
middle
point
of
the
linear
portion
of
the
curve
(starting
at
the
origin
of
the
graph).
It
is
represented
by
the
green
line
in
the
graph.
If
you
switch
back
to
a
linear
compliance
model,
this
is
the
value
that
will
be
used
as
a
starting
point
for
C
in
this
case.
3. Inflection
Point
1
and
Inflection
Point
2
are
the
equivalent
of
what
is
commonly
referred
to
as
the
lower
and
upper
inflection
points
in
P/V
graphs.
NOTE
Compensations
will
be
turned
OFF
when
working
with
non-‐linear
compliance.
Allocation
of
compliance
adjustments
would
have
to
be
arbitrary
and
therefore
should
rather
be
made
proactively
by
the
user.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
11.1.1.2 Time-‐Varying
Parameters
for
the
Patient
Model
It
is
sometimes
desirable
to
be
able
to
create
patient
models
that
vary,
breath-‐by-‐breath,
over
time.
Instead
of
having
to
create
a
script
that
has
a
new
entry
for
every
breath
of
the
patient,
you
configure
such
time-‐varying-‐parameters’
models
(TVP
models)
inside
of
a
specific
patient
model.
The
TVP-‐set
of
patient
parameters
exists
in
parallel
to
the
static
values
and
is
called
upon
when
the
TVP
flag
is
ON.
For
this
reason,
once
the
TVP
switch
activates
TVP
mode,
it
is
required
that
all
parameters
of
the
model
are
present
as
TVP.
This
will
include
also
those
that
you
don’t
actually
want
as
time-‐varying.
In
this
case,
simply
assign
constant
values
to
these
parameters
inside
the
TVP
Editor.
1. With
the
Time-‐Varying
Parameters
switch
in
the
Time
Varying
position,
click
Edit
.
The
Time-‐Varying
Parameter
Menu
pop-‐up
displays:
173
2
Figure
11-‐6:
Time-‐Varying
Parameters
Menu
2. Double-‐click
any
of
the
parameters
to
edit
its
time-‐varying
behavior
in
the
Variable
Parameters
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Editor.
The
Variable
Parameters
Editor
is
essentially
a
script
editor
window
for
building
change
behavior
in
individual
segments
(not
unlike
how
it
is
done
for
the
simulation
script
itself).
174
Figure
11-‐7:
Time-‐Varying
Parameters
Editor
• Single-‐click
one
of
the
entries
in
the
table
highlights
(with
a
thicker
line)
the
corresponding
segment
in
the
graph.
• Double-‐click
on
a
segment
to
bring
up
the
Curve
Segment
Editor,
where
you
can
actually
design
the
type
of
transients
you
want
the
parameter
to
perform.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
11-‐8:
Curve
Segment
Editor,
Curve
Types
Several
types
of
functions
are
available:
• Linear
start
value
and
slope
• Endpoints
start
and
end
values)
• Power
Y
=
Start
Value
+
Constant
*
X^(exponent)
175
When
sequencing
parameter
curve
segments,
it
is
the
user’s
responsibility
to
match
up
parameter
values
at
intersections
between
segments,
in
order
to
achieve
smooth
parameter
transitions.
Both
stochastic
distributions
are
modified
from
their
originals
for
reasons
of
practicality.
The
uniform
distribution
uses
a
seed
value,
a
mean,
and
an
amplitude
threshold
limiting
the
range
of
allowed
values.
Values
outside
of
the
range
are
clipped.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
11-‐9:
Curve
Segment
Editor,
Uniform
Distribution
176
Figure
11-‐10:
Curve
Segment
Editor,
Gauss
Distribution
The
Gauss
distribution
defines
its
amplitude
by
mean
and
standard
deviation.
Max
and
min
values
are
added
providing
a
range.
Values
outside
of
the
range
are
clipped.
NOTE
You
can
also
invoke
pre-‐defined
TVP
from
the
Interactive
Control
Panel’s
Library.
Individual
control
of
parameters
is
then
disabled
in
the
ICP
tabs
• After
completing
a
segment,
click
and
proceed
to
the
next
segment
from
the
Time-‐
Varying
Parameters
Editor,
as
needed.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
• After
completing
setup
of
all
segments
for
an
individual
parameter,
click
in
the
Time-‐
Varying
Parameters
Editor
to
return
to
the
TVP-‐Menu.
Repeat
the
process
for
all
other
parameters.
If
no
variation
over
time
is
desired
for
a
particular
parameter,
simply
use
a
segment
of
1
repetition
of
the
linear
type
and
enter
the
desired
value
into
the
start
and
endpoint
(or
start
point
with
a
slope
of
0).
TVP-‐transients
are
always
defined
relative
to
the
beginning
of
the
segment,
not
relative
to
the
whole
simulation.
NOTE
If
a
parameter
is
used
in
a
simulation
for
more
repetitions
than
the
cumulative
segments
in
the
TVP
Editor
gives
values
for,
the
last
used
value
will
be
repeated
indefinitely.
177
Figure
11-‐11:
Technical
Trigger
Efforts
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
NOTE
Of
course,
an
argument
can
be
made
that
it
is
more
realistic
to
evaluate
ventilator
trigger
performance
with
a
natural
breathing
pattern.
Regardless,
it
is
always
important
to
note
that
trigger
sensitivity
is
greatly
influenced
by
the
shape
of
the
patient
effort.
A
gradual
onset
of
effort
is
likely
to
cause
larger
delay
than
a
rapid
increase.
11.1.2.2 Sinusoidal
Patient
Effort
Sinusoidal
Patient
Effort
is
the
most
frequently
used
mode
when
generating
natural,
realistic
patient
efforts,
both
for
patients
that
are
supported
with
positive
pressure
ventilation
as
well
as
those
breathing
completely
on
their
own.
NOTE
The
following
details
about
editing
a
sinusoidal
patient
effort
model
apply
in
the
same
way
to
the
trapezoidal
effort
model.
The
resulting
flow
and
volume
patterns
are
actually
not
very
178
different.
Sometimes
it
might
be
more
straightforward
to
explain
the
effort
pattern
that
consists
of
linear
elements
rather
than
the
sinusoidal
pattern.
3
8
2 7 5
4
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
7
1
6
Figure
11-‐12:
Sinusoidal
Effort
Model
1. The
pressure
graph
at
the
bottom
left
shows
the
effort
of
the
model.
New
Feature
2. Above
it,
the
Expected
Spont.
Vol.
will
indicate
how
much
tidal
volume
this
patient
will
breathe
if
not
assisted
by
a
ventilator.
Of
course,
when
ventilator
assistance
is
given,
the
spontaneous
effort
of
the
patient
may
no
longer
be
the
determining
factor
for
tidal
volume
or
minute
ventilation.
3. The
image
of
the
phases
of
the
breath
cycle
shows
all
elements
of
a
spontaneous
effort.
179
4. They
are
set
in
the
respective
fields
(4).
The
ASL
5000
patient
effort
model
distinguishes
between
effort
during
Inspiration
and
Expiration.
You
shape
both
in-‐
and
expiratory
effort
with
a
time
period
for
Increase,
possibly
a
Hold,
and
Decrease
of
the
Pmus.
Time
periods
are
entered
as
percentages
of
the
overall
cycle
time,
which,
in
turn,
is
a
result
of
the
selected
Breath
Rate.
5. Select
this
option
to
limit
inspiratory
time
to
½
of
the
cycle
time,
i.e.,
to
limit
the
I:E
ratio
to
1:1.
6. Inspiratory
backing
off
is
a
method
to
mimic
inspiratory
inhibition
on
effort
patterns
(Hering
Breuer
effect).
Muscle
pressure
releases
once
the
stretch
receptors
of
a
patient’s
respiratory
system
have
responded
to
a
significant
tidal
volume.
While
the
ASL
5000’s
backing-‐off
feature
is
based
on
pressure,
and
not
on
volume,
it
yields
a
similar
effect
for
a
patient
with
a
given
Compliance,
since
volume
is
proportional
to
pressure
via
V
=
P
x
C.
Enter
a
number
(other
than
0,
for
example
30
%)
into
the
Inspiratory
backing
off
field.
Then,
during
all
of
inspiration,
the
amount
of
ventilator
pressure
multiplied
with
30%
is
now
subtracted
from
the
patient
effort
profile
as
it
has
been
programmed
otherwise
with
the
parameters
from
(4).
The
calculation
only
considers
pressures
above
the
baseline
(PEEP).
PIP
Pvent
30% of Pvent above PEEP
PEEP
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
No patient
backing-off
Inspir. Increase
. Hold Release
Active Inspiration
It
might
require
some
experimentation
to
optimize
the
percentage
value
for
a
realistic
“backing
off”
of
the
spontaneous
breath
at
the
onset
of
ventilator
support.
A
value
of
30
or
40
%
may
work
well
as
a
starting
point.
Using
this
feature
with
larger
percentages
will
reduce
the
spontaneous
breath
to
a
small
trigger
effort.
180
7. A
patient
will
usually
apply
expiratory
effort
(Active
Expiration)
to
overcome
back
pressure
or
to
remedy
problems
associated
with
insufficient
expiratory
time.
Without
those
needs,
expiratory
effort
can
mostly
be
kept
at
zero.
Therefore,
Expiratory
backing
off
has
been
designed
as
the
opposite
mechanism
of
what
was
just
explained
about
Inspiratory
backing
off.
It
means
that
Expiratory
Pmus
will
only
apply
as
specified
when
there
is
sufficient
back
pressure
and
the
application
(not
the
reduction)
of
patient
expiratory
effort
is
based
on
the
amount
of
positive
pressure
(above
baseline)
the
patient
“sees”
when
attempting
to
exhale.
No
backing
off
occurs
when
PIP-‐above-‐PEEP
is
greater
than
the
spontaneous
effort;
otherwise,
the
reduction
of
spontaneous
effort
is
by
the
specified
fraction
of
PIP-‐above-‐PEEP.
Figure
11-‐14:
Backing-‐off
the
Patient's
Expiratory
Effort
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
As
an
added
feature
for
realistic
patient
behavior,
you
can
specify
a
full
breath
inhibition
caused
by
positive
pressure
ventilation
(secondary
Hering-‐Breuer
Effect).
When
a
patient
model
is
scheduled
to
start
a
spontaneous
breath
(based
on
the
specified
spontaneous
breath
rate),
this
effort
can
be
fully
suppressed
if,
at
the
time
of
the
beginning
of
the
patient
effort,
the
ventilator
is
delivering
already
a
positive
pressure
breath.
8. The
setting
Cycle
Inhibition
after
pos.
pressure
adjusts
the
time
for
which,
even
after
positive
ventilator
pressure
was
present,
the
inhibition
rule
will
apply.
This
time
interval
is
defined
as
a
fraction
(0…0.99)
of
a
spontaneous
breath
cycle.
A
setting
of
0.0
(default)
disables
the
effect
(no
skipping
of
breaths).
If
you
enter
a
very
small
number
(but
one
that
is
>0.0),
you
will,
essentially,
limit
the
inhibition
to
just
the
time
during
which
positive
pressure
is
actually
being
delivered.
In
the
example
of
Figure
11-‐14,
the
light
color
line
indicates
the
case
where
no
Expiratory
backing
off
is
specified
and
the
original
expiratory
effort
pattern
is
unchanged.
If
you
specified
a
30%
backing
off,
a
181
patient
effort
as
shown
in
the
darker
line
will
result
and
only
a
back
pressure
of
130%
of
the
specified
Exp.
Pmax
would
allow
this
Exp.
Pmax
to
be
fully
applied.
11.1.2.3 File-‐Based
Patient
Effort
Select
the
User
specified
(freeform
from
file)
option
for
effort
patterns
that
are
completely
independent
from
the
preconfigured
profiles.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
11-‐15:
File-‐based
Patient
Effort
External
data
files
for
defining
spontaneous
breathing
patterns
are
typically
created
manually
using
a
spreadsheet
application,
or
consist
of
data
from
esophageal
pressure
tracings
(from
actual
patients).
Files
to
be
used
for
this
purpose
must
contain
a
column
of
pressure
values
at
the
default
sample
rate
of
512
Hz.
To
adjust
existing
data
files
to
conform
to
the
requirement,
use
the
Pressure/Flow
Input
Resampling
utility
(see
11.2.1.4,
page
194).
The
user-‐synthesized
pattern
should
describe
one
or
more
complete
breath
cycles
which
will
be
used
repetitively
during
a
simulator
run.
NOTE
The
maximum
length
of
breath
profiles
allowed
is
20
seconds
(or
10240
data
points),
equivalent
to
a
breath
rate
of
3.
The
cycle
time
is
always
determined
from
the
number
of
data
points
available,
and,
for
this
reason,
you
will
not
set
a
breath
rate.
182
Figure
11-‐16:
Patient
Effort
Model
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
The
input
ranges
from
0
to
10
V
with
a
bias
of
5V
(5V
representing
zero
effort)
in
order
to
allow
both
positive
and
negative
excursions
(forced
exhalation
or
flow
pump
with
both
negative
and
positive
flows).
A
gain
factor
setting
(Pmus
=
Volt
x
Gain)
makes
it
convenient
to
adapt
a
given
voltage
source
to
the
exact
model
requirements.
This
may
also
be
used
to
invert
the
signal
without
having
to
invert
the
voltage
applied.
CAUTION!
Always
use
inputs
that
are
within
the
range
of
0
to
10
V.
Excessive
voltage
may
damage
the
processor
board
of
the
ASL
5000.
183
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
11-‐17:
Flow
Pump
Model
In
SmartPump
Mode,
only
sinusoidal,
trapezoidal,
and
user-‐defined
waveforms
are
permitted.
NOTE
When
generating
flow
pump
patterns,
they
are
always
symmetrical,
i.e.,
they
are
automatically
duplicated
as
positive
flow
profile
after
the
negative
(inhalation)
part
of
the
cycle
has
been
completed.
184
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
11-‐18:
Sine
Wave
Flow
Pump
Model
In
the
above
example
for
a
continuous
sinusoidal
flow
pump
with
a
Vt
of
500
mL,
enter
the
following
parameters:
• 15
Spont.
Rate
(bpm)
• 18.78
Peak
Flow
(L/min)
• 25
Increase
%
• 0
Hold
%
• 25
Release
%
The
tidal
volume
of
500
mL
is
a
result
of
the
chosen
peak
flow
and
breath
rate
and
is
not
set
directly.
Similarly,
a
waveform
model
entered
as
a
volume
waveform
will
have
a
peak
flow
that
is
a
result
of
the
volume
and
breath
rate
chosen.
185
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
186
Figure
11-‐19:
500
mL
Volume
Pump
Model
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
11-‐20:
Utilities
Selector
Tab
11.2.1 Exporting
Data
Files
Data
files
are
natively
saved
in
a
binary
format,
for
reduced
file
size
and
speed
of
processing.
1. To
make
this
data
available
to
other
applications
(spreadsheet
etc.)
click
Data
File
Export
.
2. The
ASL
File
Conversion
window
opens.
187
Figure
11-‐21:
File
Conversion
Selection
You
may
perform
a
summary
translation
of
either
a
single
data
set
or,
alternatively,
of
a
whole
directory
of
captured
data.
You
may
also
choose
to
manually
select
an
individual
file
(as
opposed
to
a
complete
data
set).
The
following
file
extensions
are
used
in
the
ASL
5000
data
files
and
will
be
processed
with
this
utility
(the
last
letter
of
the
extension
is
used
to
label
either
binary
(b)
or
ASCII
(a)
files).
• Binary
ASCII
• *.brb
*.bra
breath
parameter
data
file
• *.dtb
*.dta
processed
breath
waveform
data
file
• *.rwb
*.rwa
high
resolution
raw
waveform
data
file
• *.avb
*.ava
model
parameter
file
• *.ain
*.ain
log
file
3. Click
Select
A
Simulation
to
select
a
single
data
set.
In
the
File
Explorer
window
that
opens,
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
navigate
to
your
data
directory
and
select
the
*.rwb
file
of
the
set
that
you
want
to
convert.
NOTE
Only
the
raw
data
files
(*.rwb-‐files)
of
each
data
set
are
shown
in
the
File
Explorer
navigation,
but
you
will
be
converting/exporting
the
whole
set.
4. Similarly,
click
Select
A
Directory
to
convert/export
a
whole
directory.
In
the
File
Explorer
window
that
opens,
click
Select
Folder
once
you
are
in
the
directory
you
want
to
convert.
5. You
can
observe
the
translation
progress
in
a
small
window
that
appears.
For
very
large
files
the
process
can
take
a
short
while,
but
typically
it
is
only
a
few
seconds.
188
NOTE
The
*.bra
breath
parameter
ASCII
files
are
easily
imported
into
Microsoft
Excel.
Use
the
“text
file”
setting
for
the
import
and
make
sure
that
“All
Files”
are
enabled.
Excel’s
Text
Import
Wizard
will
detect
that
the
file
is
tab-‐delimited
and
will
guide
you
through
the
import
process.
NOTE
When
importing
waveform
data
(*.rwa
or
*.dta)
into
a
spreadsheet,
keep
in
mind
that
each
second
of
data
will
generate
as
many
as
512
rows.
Reducing
the
data
sample
rate
before
the
start
of
a
simulation
(see
page
59)
is
usually
a
good
idea
if
any
length
of
waveform
is
intended
for
processing
in
a
spreadsheet.
When
translating
files
using
the
Advanced
option,
it
is
the
responsibility
of
the
user
to
properly
assign
extensions.
In
this
case,
it
is
strongly
recommended
to
follow
the
file
naming
convention
for
the
ASCII-‐files
generated
shown
in
the
list
above
with
respect
to
their
extensions.
6. When
done,
click
Return
to
return
to
the
Utilities
tab.
11.2.1.1 AUX
Channel
Output
Resampling
AUX
signals
recorded
by
the
ASL
5000
don’t
provide
natively
equidistant
data
points.
The
frequency
with
which
they
are
recorded
varies
based
on
the
processor
load
and
other
factors.
It
can
be
expected
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
to
be
around
3
Hz.
The
ASL
5000
software
includes
a
utility
which
can
turn
the
data
stream
into
an
interpolated
signal
with
equidistant
points
of
a
user-‐specified
sample
rate.
189
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
190
Figure
11-‐23:
RespiSim®
File
Conversion
Dialog
Box
• Click
the
folder
icon
to
navigate
to
the
desired
TDMS-‐file
and
click
Convert
File
.
You
can
find
the
converted
file
with
the
extension
*.txt
in
the
same
directory
as
the
original.
NOTE
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Please
be
aware
that
the
size
of
TDMS
files
from
longer
simulations
can
easily
be
several
hundred
Megabytes
and
may
not
process
quickly,
or
cannot
be
opened
with
some
text
editor
programs.
11.2.1.3 Processing
Patient
Flow
Recordings
This
utility
automatically
creates
scripts
of
vr3-‐files
from
segments
of
patient
flow
data
recordings
for
playback
in
SmartPump
mode.
The
utility
extracts
flow
data
from
ASCII
files,
as
well
as
files
saved
in
EDF
(European
Data
Format).
1. In
the
Utilities
tab,
click
the
Patient
Flow
Extended
Replay
button
.
The
Create
Script
From
Patient
Flow
Data
Processor
window
opens:
191
Figure
11-‐24:
Patient
Flow
Data
Processor
EDF
files
typically
will
contain
several
parameter
traces
as
well
as
headers
(column
labels).
It
is
the
user’s
responsibility
to
properly
select
the
data
column
for
flow.
Similarly,
you
must
skip
a
certain
number
of
rows
at
the
beginning
of
an
ASCII
data
file
in
order
to
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
192
File
names
for
the
segment
*.vr3-‐files
are
derived
from
the
base
file
name
of
the
original
flow
data
file,
extended
with
the
number
of
the
segment
in
the
script.
The
resulting
script
may
be
inspected
using
the
Script
Editor
and
Simulation
Editor.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
11-‐25:
Recorded
Patient
Flow
Script
Each
segment
represents
a
10
second
“snippet”
of
the
originally
recorded
flow.
Approximate
Script
Duration
is
indicated
in
the
lower
right-‐hand
corner
of
the
window.
3. Double-‐click
one
of
the
segments
to
inspect.
The
Patient
Effort
Model
window
opens.
193
Figure
11-‐26:
Patient
Flow
Segment
NOTE
It is important to keep in mind that this procedure does not generate a patient model with R
and
C,
but
is
based
on
a
flow
pump
model.
Therefore,
playing
back
the
script
will
not
respond
to
a
ventilator
in
the
way
a
Pmus-‐R-‐C-‐model
would.
Rather,
the
flows
(the
piston
movement
of
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
the
simulator)
is
prescribed
at
any
point
in
time
by
the
flow
rate
that
was
part
of
the
recording
(pressure
feedback
is
off
for
pump
models).
4. Click
<Back
in
the
Patient
Effort
Model
window
r
to
return
to
the
Utilities
tab.
11.2.1.4 Pressure/Flow
Profile
Resampling
The
option
of
user-‐defined
muscle
pressure
profile
(or
user-‐defined
flow
profile
in
SmartPump
mode,
see
page
184)
in
Patient
Effort
Model
often
requires
a
reprocessing
of
recorded
profiles.
Data
for
use
as
a
patient
profile
needs
to
be
at
a
512
Hz
sample
rate,
which
is
higher
than
the
rate
used
by
most
patient
monitors.
With
the
Pressure/Flow
Input
Resampling
utility,
you
adjust
the
data
rate
as
well
as
adjust
the
gain
by
multiplying
the
profile
with
a
gain
factor.
The
utility
includes
a
batch
processing
feature
for
efficient
processing
of
a
large
number
of
these
files.
• In
the
Utilities
tab,
click
the
Pressure/Flow
Input
Resampling
button
.
The
Pressure/Flow
Input
Resampling
window
opens:
194
1
2
3
Figure
11-‐27:
Pressure/Flow
Input
Resamling
1. Click
the
folder
icon
by
the
Directory
field
on
the
Input
side.
Then,
to
select
profile(s)
to
be
processed
from
an
input
directory,
navigate
to
these
profiles
from
the
standard
dialog
box.
2. There,
enter
assumed
original
and
desired
new
sample
rates
(512
Hz
as
default).
Flow
measuring
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
devices
typically
sample
at
much
lower
rates
than
512
Hz.
Entering
the
actual
value
of
sampling
as
Original
Sample
Frequency
(Hz)
will
preserve
the
time-‐domain
characteristics
of
the
data
by
interpolating
up
to
the
512
Hz
needed
for
operating
the
simulator
at
its
highest
fidelity.
3. Additionally,
you
can
choose
a
gain
factor
other
than
1
to
convert,
for
example,
from
a
signal
given
in
L/s
to
one
that
conforms
to
the
ASL
requirement
of
L/min
as
unit
of
flow.
If,
for
example,
data
for
a
patient
flow
profile
was
collected
in
L/s,
then
a
gain
factor
of
60
must
be
used
to
obtain
the
correct
flow
rate
from
the
simulator
(L/min).
If
data
needs
to
be
inverted,
a
negative
gain
factor
may
also
be
used.
Scaling
of
patient
efforts
may
also
help
meeting
a
specific
tidal
volume
requirement.
• Save
the
new
profile
under
its
own
(new)
name
via
the
dialog
box
that
opens
once
you
click
the
Resample
button
.
• To
return
to
the
Utilities
tab,
click
the
Return
button
to
return
to
the
Utilities
tab.
195
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
11-‐28:
TCP
Breath
Client
Demo
Application
The
default
port
used
to
connect
to
the
server
(i.e.,
the
PC
running
the
ASL
host
software)
is
port
6342.
In
order
to
establish
a
connection
from
a
separate
PC,
you
simply
need
to
launch
this
application
(after
copying
it
to
the
PC
you
want
to
act
as
a
client
or
“listener”),
and
enter
the
correct
server
identification
(the
network
IP
address
of
the
PC
running
the
ASL
host
software).
The
port
to
“listen
to”
is
still
the
same
(6342).
For
pre-‐configuration
of
the
TCP
Breath
Client,
please
refer
to
11.2.1.7,
TCP
Broadcast
Configuration
below.
196
Figure
11-‐29:
TCP
Waveform
Client
(Raw
Data)
User’s Manual ASL 5000, SW 3 .6, Rev.1, © IngMar M edical, L td. 2016
Figure
11-‐30:
TCP
Waveform
Client
(Processed
Data)
197
The
demonstration
application
for
a
listening
client,
TCP
Waveform
Client.exe,
is
also
included
in
the
ASL
host
software
installation.
You
can
access
it
from
the
Utility
tab
of
the
Standard
Window
Manager.
Copy
this
executable
to
a
PC
on
which
you
plan
to
observe
the
waveforms
and
then
enter
the
correct
server
identification
(the
network
IP
address
of
the
PC
running
the
ASL
host
software).
See
11.2.1.7,
TCP
Broadcast
Configuration
for
preconfiguring
both
client
applications.
11.2.1.7 TCP
Broadcast
Configuration
• Select
the
TCP
Configuration
option
in
the
Control
drop-‐down
menu
of
the
Standard
Window
Manager
for
changing
the
server’s
port
if
such
a
change
is
necessary
to
avoid
conflicts
on
a
network.
The
TCP
Broadcast
Configuration
window
opens:
2
1
Figure
11-‐31:
TCP
Broadcast
Configuration
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
1. Enter
a
number
into
Broadcast
Precision
to
adjust
the
number
of
decimals
with
which
the
data
is
streamed
(15
is
the
default
value).
2. Use
the
slider
to
switch
between
Raw
and
Processed
data.
198
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Data
from
the
analog
channels
is
retrieved
or
output
while
the
simulator
is
running.
Figure
11-‐32:
Analog
Data
Panel
on
Run
Time
Home
199
From
the
Run
Time
Home
panel,
select
the
Record
AUX
option
to
generate
a
separate
data
file
data.aux
containing
the
readings
for
both
channels
as
well
as
vol%
of
oxygen
as
well
as
a
time
stamp.
Updates
to
this
file
are
written
approximately
4
to
5
times
a
second.
Recorded
values
of
other
analog
signals
retrieved
by
the
ASL
5000
are
also
provided
in
the
standard
data
file
set
as
follows:
0
➤
AOUT_OFF,
//
Vout
is
"off";
its
value
is
always
zero
1
➤
AOUT_VOLUME_COMP1
//
model
volume
in
compartment
1
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
200
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
201
1400)
Connector
8-‐position
ODU,
mates
with
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
(style
used
for
serial
no.s
above
ODU
S11M07-‐P08MFG0-‐6550
or
equivalent
LEMO
plug
1400)
On
ASL
5000
Simulators
beginning
with
serial
no.
1401,
the
configuration
at
the
back
looks
as
follows:
Figure
11-‐33:
ASL
5000
Communication
Connections
(Back
Panel)
2
TTL
=
Transistor-‐Transistor
Logic,
referring
to
a
logic
signal
that
has
nominal
voltage
levels
of
5
V
(high)
and
0
V
(low)
202
For
pin
assignments
of
the
sockets,
please
refer
to
the
“Preparation
Addendum”
provided
with
the
mating
cables
for
Digital
Out
and
Analog
I/O
in
your
ASL
5000
Accessory
Kit
(included).
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
203
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
204
11.5.1 TAI
Overview
Figure
11-‐34:
Test
Automation
Interface
Figure
12-‐1:
Cylinder
Temperature
Controller
Front
Panel
The upper digital display indicates the actual temperature reading (PV = Process Value).
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
To
change
the
temperature
setting:
1. Press
MENU
on
the
controller,
until
the
SP1
(SP1
=
Set
Point
1)
light,
to
the
left
of
the
set
temperature
display
SV
(SV
=
Set
Value),
starts
blinking.
2. Press
▲/MAX
for
changing
digits,
and
▶ /MIN
for
proceeding
to
the
next
digit.
3. After
you
are
finished,
press
ENTER
and
the
controller
will
acknowledge
that
the
new
value
has
been
stored.
When
decreasing
the
temperature
setting,
keep
in
mind
that
the
CTC
unit
cannot
actively
cool
and
the
decrease
in
temperature,
therefore,
will
depend
exclusively
on
heat
diffusion
to
the
environment.
For
this
reason,
factors
such
as
gas
exchange
of
the
simulator,
room
temperature,
etc.
will
determine
the
lowest
possible
temperature
and
the
time
it
takes
to
reach
a
lower
temperature.
As
part
of
the
instrument
documentation,
a
separate
Operator's
Manual
for
the
temperature
PID
controller
is
enclosed
for
further
reference.
You
may
also
contact
IngMar
Medical
for
additional
setup
documentation,
in
case
the
basic
settings
of
the
controller
is
inadvertently
changed.
205
Figure
12-‐2:
Paramagnetic
Oxygen
Transducer
If
this
option
is
installed
in
your
ASL
5000,
simply
click
the
checkbox
in
the
ASL
Run
Time
Home
panel
to
see
the
value
of
O2
readings
(see
Figure
11-‐32
on
page
199).
NOTE
Ventilators
always
include
a
correction
for
O2
concentration
in
their
flow
sensors
and
should
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
206
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
12-‐3:
ASL
5000
with
Preemie
Option
Installed
12.3.1.1 Assembly
To
assemble
the
PreemieLung
Cylinder:
1. First,
attach
the
piston
for
the
2.5”
cylinder
is
with
its
extension
rod
to
the
regular
(7”,
adult
size)
piston
plate.
2. Gently
screw
the
assembly
into
the
threaded
adapter
on
the
large
piston
plate,
taking
care
to
not
damage
the
seal
on
the
small
piston.
207
Figure
12-‐4:
Installation
of
Preemie
Cylinder
3. Take
the
preemie
cylinder
and
slide
it
over
the
2.5”
piston
plate
at
a
slight
angle,
so
that
no
sharp
edge
cuts
into
the
seal
on
the
piston.
4. Push
the
cylinder
gently
all
the
way
towards
the
threaded
inlet
of
the
ASL
and
turn
it
clockwise
to
engage
the
threads.
Be
careful
that
the
threads
mate
as
intended.
When
turning
the
cylinder,
only
the
friction
from
the
kapseal
should
inhibit
the
motion.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
CAUTION!
Misalignment
of
the
threads
could
cause
damage
to
either
the
Preemie
Cylinder
or
the
ASL
main
unit!
5. Fully
thread
the
piston
in
(until
the
shoulder
ring
sits
directly
against
the
brass
receptacle).
Gently
tighten.
6. Remove
the
short
cable
connecting
the
internal
temperature
sensor
(regular
“adult/neonatal”
cylinder)
to
the
measuring
circuit.
7. Connect
the
3-‐pole
Hypertronics
plug
into
the
receptacle
marked
External
Cylinder
Temp.
at
top
of
the
ASL
5000.
This
will
connect
the
temperature
measurement
system
to
the
gas
temperature
sensor
of
the
preemie
cylinder
instead
of
the
regular
sensor
on
the
adult
cylinder.
208
• For
use
with
the
2.5”
Preemie
Cylinder,
copy
the
file
c:\lung\ASLNEO25.40
into
ASL5000.DOS,
in
the
same
directory.
• To
interrupt
the
program
flow
with
the
keyboard
combination
Ctrl/C,
use
PuTTY
or
a
similar
terminal
program
on
the
COM2
serial
port
of
the
ASL
5000
(labeled
Terminal)
with
settings
of
9600-‐8-‐N-‐1.
3
• Switch
to
the
c:\
prompt
(type:
c:)
and
change
directories
to
c:\lung
(type:
cd
c:\lung)
• Execute
the
command:
copy
ASLNEO25.40
ASL5000.DOS
• Before
use
of
the
ASL
5000
with
the
standard
7”
Adult
Cylinder,
perform
a
similar
copy
command
using
the
file
ASLADL70.40
to
return
to
the
standard
setting:
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
copy
ASLADL70.40
ASL5000.DOS
12.3.1.4 Operation
with
Attached
Preemie
Cylinder
Please
keep
in
mind
that
maximum
flow
rates
and
volumes
are
reduced
by
approximately
a
factor
of
8
when
using
the
Preemie
Cylinder
(PC)
instead
of
the
Adult
Cylinder
(AC).
Patient
parameter
files
(vr3-‐
files)
require
settings
that
are
compatible
with
the
physical
characteristics
of
the
altered
system
(for
3
When
using
an
ASL
5000
equipped
with
the
most
recent
CPU
(Helios),
user
interface
(console)
redirection
first
needs
to
be
turned
on.
For
this
purpose,
immediately
use
the
<Esc>
key
to
enter
BIOS
mode
from
where
you
can
enable
console
redirection.
209
2 2
example,
tidal
volume).
As
a
general
rule,
it
is
the
relative
size
of
the
piston
area
(rPC /rAC
=
0.12755)
that
is
responsible
for
the
differences.
Figure
12-‐5:
Preemie
Cylinder:
Pressure
Line
Manifold
Please
make
sure
that
the
line
for
pressure
measurement
is
properly
reading
the
pressure
from
the
cylinder
that
is
currently
in
use.
Use
the
stopcock
orientation
as
it
is
indicated
on
the
label
at
the
front
of
the
ASL.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
CAUTION!
Do
not
block
the
port
of
the
main
(Adult)
cylinder
while
operating
the
ASL
5000
with
the
Preemie
cylinder
attached.
It
would
prevent
piston
motion
and
could
damage
the
unit!
Misalignment of the threads could cause damage to the lid and/or the ASL 5000 main unit!
210
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
12-‐6:
Auxiliary
Gas
Exchange
Cylinder
• Connect
the
simulator
to
the
female
22mm
ISO
port
at
the
base
of
the
AGEC
with
the
1
ft.
long
flexible
hose
supplied.
A
second
22
mm
port
is
located
on
the
top
and
will
normally
be
used
for
directing
gas
into
a
bellow
or
bag
placed
inside
the
AGEC.
Inspiration
by
the
simulator
will
start
to
evacuate
the
space
surrounding
the
bag
or
bellow
and
therefore
inflate
it.
Expiration
will
press
gas
out
of
the
bellow
or
bag
again.
The
additional
(compressible)
volume
of
the
AGEC
is
approximately
3
L,
thereby
adding
a
parasitary
compliance
of
3
mL/cmH2O.
This
may
be
compensated
by
entering
the
3
L
as
a
tubing
volume
in
the
simulation
editor
compensation
settings
(see
page
171).
Please
see
also
a
special
Application
Note
regarding
the
AGEC
for
further
details.
211
An
option—
the
Chest
Rise
Module—has
specifically
been
developed
for
the
ASL
5000,
for
use
with
Laerdal’s
family
of
SimManTM
manikins.
The
kit
consists
of
a
valve
module
that
can
take
over
the
SimMan’s
chest
rise,
reflecting
the
amount
of
volume
that
has
been
applied
to
the
ASL
5000
while
making
the
movement
synchronous
with
the
inhalation/exhalation
effort
of
the
patient
model.
Please
refer
to
the
special
Application
Note
for
details
of
this
setup
for
both
the
classic
SimMan
as
well
as
SimMan
3G.The
Chest
Rise
Module
can
also
be
used
to
give
the
more
basic
Laerdal
Kelly
manikin
simulator
true
high-‐fidelity
lungs
and
respiratory
mechanics,
including
the
ability
to
breathe
spontaneously.
Further
software
integration
will
be
available
with
plug-‐ins
currently
in
preparation
for
Laerdal’s
LLEAP
software
(expected
release
early
2017).
Please
contact
IngMar
Medical
for
details.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
12-‐7:
Chest
Rise
Module
212
Figure
12-‐8:
Simulator
Bypass
and
Leak
Valve
Module
The
SBLVM
connections
are
female
15
mm
ISO
ports.
The
test
lung
and
the
connecting
circuit
piece
are
attached
with
22/15
mm
adapters
to
the
SBLVM.
Please
refer
to
the
diagram
below
for
the
proper
connections.
User’s Manual ASL 5000, SW 3 .6, Rev.1, © IngMar M edical, L td. 2016
Figure
12-‐9:
SBLVM
Schematics
213
The
second
feature
of
the
SBLVM
is
that
it
provides
3
different
sizes
of
leaks.
This
feature
can
be
used
to
simulate
particular
patient
conditions,
such
as
an
ET-‐tube
leak.
The
orifices
for
these
leak
settings
are
exchangeable
with
ones
that
provide
different
leak
rates.
The
diagram
below
shows
the
characteristics
of
leak
flow
versus
pressure
for
the
standard
orifices.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
12-‐10:
SBLVM
Orifice
Characteristics
214
If
your
original
purchase
of
the
RespiSim®
system
included
the
Ventilator
Interface
Kit,
you
don’t
have
to
perform
any
software
installation.
Skip
to
12.7.2,
Ventilator
Interface
Connections.
NOTE
If
you
have
upgraded
to
software
3.6
and
you
would
prefer
to
use
the
VIK
functionality
“as
is”,
i.e.,
without
the
browser-‐enabled
charting
capabilities,
please
contact
IngMar
Medical.
NOTE
Users
with
the
first-‐generation
(Bluetooth
linked)
data
acquisition
bridges
who
wish
to
upgrade
to
the
current
capabilities
will
have
to
upgrade
their
VIK
hardware
(to
a
Fusion
Bridge).
Please
contact
IngMar
Medical
for
details
about
our
hardware
exchange
discount
program.
User’s Manual ASL 5000, SW 3 .6, Rev.1, © IngMar M edical, L td. 2016
Figure
12-‐11:
RespiSim®
Ventilator
Interface
Kit
(VIK)
4
For
more
information
on
Bridgetech
Medical
solutions
for
electronic
charting,
please
visit
www.bridgetechmedical.com.
215
to
make
hidden
files
visible.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
216
Figure
12-‐12:
Bridgetech
WebClinical
-‐
Sign
In
Log
in
with
the
following
credentials
User
name:
???
Password:
???
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
NOTE
Once
the
user
name
and
password
has
been
assigned
they
are
permanent
and
cannot
be
changed.
I
have
asked
Tharen
what
should
be
used.
I
currently
use
Test
and
123
to
log
in,
but
this
does
not
show
an
empty
database
since
it
logs
you
into
Tharen’s
test
database.
We
want
a
new
fresh
database
for
our
users.
217
2
Figure
12-‐13:
Bridgetech
WebClinical
–
Starting
Bridge
Creation
3. Click
on
the
pop-‐up
window.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
3
Figure
12-‐14:
Bridgetech
WebClinical
-‐
Create
Bridge
218
4. On
the
bottom
of
the
Fusion
Bridge,
locate
the
serial
number
of
the
unit
(it
will
either
start
with
ALFA
or
BETA).
Enter
this
serial
number,
including
dashes,
in
the
Add
new
bridge
window
5. Click
.
4
5
Figure
12-‐15:
Bridgetech
WebClinical
-‐
Add
New
Bridge
6. Click
on
Commands
and
select
Configure.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
6
Figure
12-‐16:
Bridgetech
WebClinical
-‐
Configure
New
Bridge
219
7. On
the
General
tab,
ensure
that
the
Serial
Number
and
Bridge
Type
are
correct.
7
Figure
12-‐17:
Bridgetech
WebClinical
–
Confirm
Bridge
For
wired
setup
(Bridge
connected
to
router
via
Ethernet
cable):
8. Click
on
the
Ethernet
tab
8
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
9
Figure
12-‐18:
Bridgetech
WebClinical
–
Configure
via
Ethernet
9. If
you
are
connected
to
the
router
provided
with
the
ASL
5000,
it
will
assign
an
IP
address
through
DHCP.
In
this
setup,
leave
Use
DHCP
checked
and
the
other
fields
blank.
If
a
network
requires
fixed
IP
addresses
(for
example
in
an
institutional
network),
enter
proper
network
settings
for
Address,
Netmask,
and
Gateway
per
instructions
from
your
IT
specialist.
220
10
11
12
Figure
12-‐19:
Bridgetech
WebClinical
-‐
Configure
via
WiFi
11. If
you
are
connected
to
the
router
provided
with
the
ASL
5000,
it
will
assign
IP
addresses
through
DHCP.
In
this
setup,
leave
Use
DHCP
checked
and
the
other
fields
blank.
If
a
network
requires
fixed
IP
addresses
(for
example
in
an
institutional
network),
enter
proper
network
settings
for
Address,
Netmask,
and
Gateway
per
instructions
from
your
IT
specialist.
12. Enter
the
network
ID
in
the
SSID
field
and
select
the
proper
Authentication
Type
if
applicable.
If
a
password
is
required,
enter
it
in
the
Password
box.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
221
13. Click
.
13
Figure
12-‐20:
Bridgetech
WebClinical
-‐
Save
Configuration
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
222
The
VIK
can
be
connected
to
the
router
in
a
wireless
or
hard-‐wired
configuration.
Connect
Fusion
Bridge
to
ventilator.
1. Connect
blue/yellow
USB-‐to-‐serial
adapter
combination
to
the
Fusion
Bridge
with
its
USB
end.
• Connect
Ethernet
cable
(supplied)
to
the
yellow
adapter
of
the
blue/yellow
combination.
• Connect
the
other
end
of
the
Ethernet
cable
into
the
appropriate
ventilator
specific
adapter
(see
list
on
page
278).
2. Plug
ventilator
specific
adapter
into
the
communications
port
(Serial
/
MIB
/
LTV
ports,
etc.)
on
the
ventilator
(typically
found
in
the
back).
3. Connect
power
adapter
to
the
Fusion
Bridge
ALFA
(or
BETA)
and
plug
in
(there
is
no
On/Off
switch).
For
a
hard-‐wired
configuration:
4. Connect
the
15
ft
Ethernet
cable
to
the
back
of
the
router,
and
then
to
the
Ethernet
port
of
the
Fusion
Bridge
(ALFA
or
BETA).
2
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
4 1
3
1
Figure
12-‐21:
Typical
Fusion
Bridge
(ALFA)
to
Ventilator
Connection
(Fusion
BETA
Bridge
shown
in
insert)
223
12.7.3
Capturing
Ventilator
Parameters
in
RespiSim®
The
VIK
allows
to
record
all
parameters
that
the
ventilator
makes
available
• Create
Patient
or
select
an
existing
patient
NOTE
It
is
good
practice
to
associate
an
MRN
with
the
patient
name.
Patient
names
should
indicate
the
type
of
simulation
for
later
reference
to
the
collected
data.
Data
collected
will
be
ventilator-‐specific.
For
this
reason,
RespiSim®
contains
a
generic
ventilator
model,
called
the
Universal
Ventilator
(Universal
Vent).
In
RespiSim,
Universal
Vent
is
selected
by
default.
When
Universal
Vent
is
selected,
RespiSim®
maps
the
parameter
names
coming
from
the
specific
ventilator
that
is
connected
into
a
list
of
Universal
Vent
parameters.
Parameters
that
a
ventilator
outputs
that
do
not
have
a
mapping
assigned
are
placed
at
the
end
of
the
list.
If
there
is
no
mapping,
the
StandardParamterID
is
0.
If
a
user
selects
the
“real”
vent,
the
Parameter
Name
is
taken
from
the
Vent
itself
as
opposed
to
the
“mapped”
name.
However,
the
ID
number
will
still
be
the
same
as
above.
The
below
table
shows
our
mapping:
Parameter
Name
Standard
Parameter
Name
Standard
Param.
ID
Param.
ID
Mode
1
FiO2
set
15
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
224
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Body
weight
56
Tidal
Vol
Inspired
95
Amp
Delta
P
57
Vol
Leak
96
Wiggle
58
Low
Tidal
Vol
alarm
97
Power
59
FiO2
(range
alarm)
98
Frequency
60
Disconnnect
(vent-‐al
99
Circuit
Temp
61
Disconnect
(patient-‐
100
Ramp
Time
62
MinVol
(low-‐alarm)
101
aprv
p-‐high
set
63
Vol
(mand-‐low-‐alarm)
102
aprv
p-‐low
set
64
Vol
(spont-‐low-‐alarm
103
Volume
Leak
%
65
Press
Gas
(low-‐alarm
104
Rise
Time
%
set
66
Alarm
reset
105
Alarm
silence
67
NOTE
225
While
this
list
is
very
comprehensive,
typically
only
a
small
number
of
parameters
are
used
for
charting
and
during
RespiSim®
scenario
simulations.
For
the
purpose
of
including
ventilator-‐based
parameters
to
the
table
of
numeric
parameters
of
the
Debriefing
Screen
of
RespiSim,
or
to
the
real-‐time
view
of
the
Instructor
Dashboard,
simply
select
them
from
the
drop-‐down
list
of
available
parameters.
• Click
on
the
parameter
name
in
one
of
the
displayed
parameter
fields.
The
parameter
list
opens.
• Select
one
of
the
parameters
that
is
prefaced
by
(VENT).
12.7.4
Training
Students
in
Patient
Charting
Charting
is
an
important
aspect
of
patient
care.
The
Ventilator
Interface
Kit
helps
to
train
respiratory
therapists
in
this
skill
with
a
new
browser-‐based
tool
for
recording
patient
data
in
a
way
that
emulates
electronic
record
keeping
in
a
hospital.
Patient
status,
notes,
etc.
are
entered
into
a
coherent
form
that
also
includes
the
ventilator
parameters
captured
by
the
VIK.
Instructors
can
use
data
captured
during
a
simulation
for
debriefing
and
assessing
students.
Any
browser-‐enabled
device
may
be
used
(tablet,
smartphone,
notebook
PC).
1. Open
a
browser
and
navigate
to
http://localhost/client
The
browser
will
present
a
sign-‐in
window
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
12-‐22:
WebClinical
-‐
Sign
In
2. Log
in
with
your
pre-‐assigned
credentials
to
open
the
Patient
Selection
window
226
3
4
Figure
12-‐23:
WebClinical
-‐
Patient
Selection
3. Click
on
the
“patient”
that
you
want
to
use
for
the
current
simulation.
4. Click
A
window
with
options
for
this
patient
opens
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
5
Figure
12-‐24:
WebClinical
–
Floor
Care/Emergency
Response
Selection
5. Click
Floor
Care/Emergency
Response.
227
If
more
than
one
patient
is
available
and
you
switch
to
a
different
patient,
a
pop-‐up
will
ask
you
to
verify
the
patient
selection.
6
Figure
12-‐25:
WebClinical
–
Floor
Care/Emergency
Response
Menu
6. Confirm
that
the
correct
patient
is
selected.
The
Floor
Care/Emergency
Response
Menu
window
will
open.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
The
Floor
Care/Emergency
Response
is
the
starting
point
for
recording
a
patient’s
respiratory
initial
status
and
subsequent
assessments
as
well
as
treatments
administered.
From
here
you
also
access
the
Notes/Verify
screen
used
before
saving
a
new
chart
recording
(see
Figure
12-‐26
on
the
next
page).
228
7
8
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
12-‐26:
WebClinical
–
Floor
Care/Emergency
Response
Overview
7. From
the
selection
that
opens,
click
Setup.
Figure
12-‐27
on
the
next
page
shows
the
options
that
you
have
available
for
charting
the
initial
patient
setup
229
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
12-‐27:
WebClinical
–
Floor
Care
Patient
Setup
Overview
230
You
make
Patient
Assessments
in
the
same
way
as
you
would
in
a
real
hospital
patient
record
keeping
system.
The
available
options
are
outlined
in
Figure
12-‐28.
User’s Manual ASL 5000, SW 3 .6, Rev.1, © IngMar M edical, L td. 2016
Figure
12-‐28:
WebClinical
–
Floor
Care
Patient
Assessment
Overview
231
From
any
of
the
sub-‐menus,
clicking
will
return
you
to
the
previous
menu.
Click
to
return
directly
to
the
Floor
Care
Menu.
8. When
charting
is
complete,
click
,
click
Review
&
Exit
in
the
Floor
Care
Menu
to
save
all
entries.
The
Notes/Verify
window
will
open.
9
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
12-‐29:
WebClinical
–
Saving
Charted
Notes
9. Click
to
save
the
chart.
You
will
be
returned
to
the
Patients
window.
232
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
233
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
12-‐30:
RespiSim®
Plus
Package
Frequently,
it
is
easier
to
move
the
simulation
to
a
location
where
the
ventilator
that
students
need
to
be
trained
on
is
available.
A
height-‐adjustable
cart
for
placing
the
entire
ASL
5000
system
is
available
as
an
option
that
will
create
a
mobile
simulation
station.
The
ASL
5000
can
be
mounted
to
a
tray
on
the
cart
and
a
notebook
computer
can
be
placed
on
a
shelf,
with
a
lockable
compartment
underneath.
The
cart
also
facilitates
mounting
a
screen
(up
to
a
40”
diagonal
or
20
lbs.,
not
included
with
the
basic
cart
option)
and
is
an
ideal
platform
for
in-‐situ
training,
where
the
complete
training
station
is
brought
right
into
an
ICU
or
NICU
for
training
staff
in
small
groups
or
one-‐on-‐one.
234
The
version
of
this
cart
is
as
depicted
in
Figure
12-‐30,
available
as
the
RespiSim®
Plus
package.
In
this
version,
the
PC
is
a
touch-‐screen
all-‐in-‐one
model
that
comes
installed
as
part
of
the
system
instead
of
a
customer-‐supplied
monitor.
Such
a
screen
can
be
mounted
using
a
standard
VESA-‐mount
100
x
100
mm
adapter
that
is
supplied
with
the
cart.
For
larger
screens
an
additional
adapter
may
be
used
(included)
that
provides
the
VESA
200
x
100
mm
pattern.
NOTE
Before
purchasing
a
screen,
make
sure
the
model
you
are
selecting
supports
one
of
these
VESA
wall-‐mount
standards.
WARNING!
Always
observe
the
load
limit
of
20
lbs.
(9
kg)
for
a
monitor
mounted
on
the
cart.
An
overly
top-‐heavy
assembly
would
present
a
risk
of
tipping
and
bodily
injury.
A
surge-‐protected,
6-‐outlet
power
strip
for
powering
all
items
on
the
cart
is
included
in
the
package.
The
height
adjustability
allows
for
a
sitting
position
with
the
appropriate
height
for
the
notebook
keyboard,
or
a
standing
position.
• To
adjust
the
height,
press
the
foot
pedal
at
the
front
of
the
cart
base.
• Lock
the
two
front
casters
to
prevent
an
inadvertent
roll-‐away
when
the
unit
is
stationary.
CAUTION!
• Always
secure
all
loose
items
when
moving
the
loaded
cart.
• Make
sure
that
the
simulator
is
clamped
tightly
in
its
tray.
• Always
lower
the
height
adjustable
column
before
moving
unit.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
• Use
special
care
when
rolling
over
bumps
or
uneven
surfaces,
such
as
when
going
through
elevator
doors.
235
13.1.1.1 Governing
Equation
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Normal
lungs,
together,
act
primarily,
as
a
single,
pneumatic,
visco-‐elastic
compartment.
This
implies
that
their
mechanical
properties
are
uniformly
distributed
across
both
lungs.
Figure
13-‐1
shows
a
flow-‐
resistive
airway
leading
to
a
single,
representative,
elastic
lung
compartment,
contained
within
a
distensible
shell
representing
the
chest
wall.
The
lung
and
chest
wall
are
separated
by
a
thin
intrapleural
space.
The
governing
equation
for
this
configuration
can
be
developed
by
considering
each
component
individually:
5
This
section
is
authored
by
Frank
P.
Primiano,
Jr.
236
The
patient
effort
as
used
in
the
ASL
software
environment
(plots
and
pressure
profiles)
is
pictured
as
the
negative
value
of
pmus with
the
intention
of
creating
more
clearly
distinguishable
plots.
pAO
RAW
pPL
CW ύ
(+) L
CL
υL Δpmus
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
pBS
Figure
13-‐1:
A
one-‐compartment
ventilatory
system
in
which...
pAO
is
the
change
in
pressure
at
the
airway
opening
pBS
is
the
change
in
pressure
on
the
body
surface
pPL
is
the
change
in
pressure
within
the
intrapleural
space
Δpmus
is
the
change
in
the
net
force
produced
by
the
respiratory
muscles
expressed
as
an
equivalent
pressure
difference;
often
called
muscle
pressure
difference
6
Even
in
normal
lungs,
these
relations
may
be
more
accurately
portrayed
as
non-‐linear.
However,
a
first
approximation
as
a
linear
system
has
been
found
to
be
extremely
useful,
clinically.
237
Δptot
=
(pAO–
pBS)
+
Δpmus
=
υL
/
Ctot
+
RAW
·∙
ύL
4)
…in
which
Δp
is
the
total
effective
pressure
difference
driving
the
ventilatory
system,
and,
Ctot,
the
total
system
compliance,
is
given
by
Besides
the
airway
resistance,
RAW,
and
the
total
compliance,
Ctot,
another
mechanical
property
of
importance
is
their
product,
called
the
time
constant,
τ tot : t
Equation
(4)
describes
a
single-‐compartment
system
with
a
single
degree
of
freedom.
The
salient
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
characteristic
of
a
single-‐degree-‐of-‐freedom
system
is
that
it
can
be
characterized
by
a
single
time
constant.
Clinically,
this
implies
that
both
lungs,
when
simultaneously
subjected
to
the
same
pressure
difference,
will
inflate
and
deflate
in
unison.
Normal
lungs
exhibit
age-‐
and
stature-‐appropriate
values
for
RAW
,
Ctot
and
τtot.
For
a
non-‐apneic
patient
on
a
ventilator,
equation
(4)
shows
that
the
pressure
difference
driving
the
system
has
two
components,
as
previously
described:
the
physical
pressure
difference
across
the
system
that
can
be
manipulated
by
the
ventilator,
and
the
equivalent
pressure
difference
produced
by
active
contraction
of
the
respiratory
muscles.
Figure
13-‐2
shows
example
wave
shapes
that
could
result
from
a
normal
ventilatory
system
driven
by
a
ventilator
(assisted
breaths)
and
the
respiratory
muscles.
238
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
239
Figure
13-‐2:
Normal
ventilatory
system
responses
during
assisted
inspiration
(with
expiratory
muscle
forcing)
Vei
and
Vee
are
end-‐inspiratory,
and
end-‐expiratory
volumes,
respectively.
VT
is
tidal
volume.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
13.1.1.3 Inspiratory
Work
In
practice,
work
of
breathing
is
routinely
calculated
for
segments
of
the
breath,
e.g.,
inspiration
and/or
expiration,
separately.
Let
us
begin
with
inspiration.
We
can
rewrite
equation
(7),
after
substituting
the
middle
terms
of
equation
(4),
as:
VT
⌠
wI(N)=|[(pAO
–
pBS)
+
Δpmus]
dυL
(8)
Vei ⌡
VT V
⌠ T
⌠
=|
(pAO
–
pBS)
dυL
+
|
Δpmus dυL
Vei ⌡ Vei ⌡
=
wvent
I(N)
+
wmus
I(N)
(9)
240
…where
Vei
is
end-‐inspiratory
volume,
and
VT
is
tidal
volume.
In
this
way,
we
can
separately
compute
the
work
of
the
ventilator,
wvent
I(N),
and
the
work
of
the
respiratory
muscles,
wmus
I(N),
during
inspiration.
We
can
also
substitute
the
extreme
right
hand
terms
of
equation
4
(Δptot
=
(pAO–
pBS)
+
Δpmus
=
υL
/
Ctot
+
RAW
·∙
ύL)
into
equation
7
(wAB
=
∫
Δp
dυ)
to
yield:
These
ideas
are
illustrated
graphically
on
Figure
13-‐3,
a
Δp-‐υL
plot
of
the
data
of
Figure
13-‐2.
We
can
see
that,
except
for
the
initial
pressure
drop
in
curve
(a),
required
to
trigger
the
ventilator,
the
pressure
differences
and
volume
changes
are
both
positive
on
all
the
curves.
Thus,
the
calculated
work
is
positive
in
these
regions.
Positive
work
corresponds
to
work
done
on
the
ventilatory
system
by
the
various
pressure
differences.
Negative
work
corresponds
to
work
done
by
the
ventilatory
system
on
the
components
producing
the
pressure
differences.
The
negative
area
in
the
initial
portion
of
Figure
13-‐3(a)
represents
work
done
by
the
respiratory
muscles
on
the
ventilator
to
cause
it
to
trigger.
The
work
under
the
total
driving
pressure
difference-‐volume
curve
is
divided
into
two
regions:
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
• Elastic
work
to
the
left
of
the
total
compliance
curve,
and
• Resistive
work
to
the
right
of
it.
Elastic
work
is
stored
and
can
be
used
by
the
system
to
compress
the
volume
back
to
end-‐expiratory
volume.
Resistive
work
is
dissipated
as
heat
and
cannot
be
reclaimed
or
reused
by
the
system.
It
should
be
noted
that,
although
Figure
13-‐3
is
reminiscent
of
a
Campbell
diagram,
it
is
not
a
Campbell
diagram.
In
a
Campbell
diagram,
esophageal
pressure
change
minus
body
surface
pressure
change,
(pES
–
pBS),
is
plotted
against
lung
volume
change,
υL,
along
with
the
static
Δp-‐υL
characteristic
of
the
chest
wall,
the
chest
wall
compliance,
CW,
curve.
These
two
curves
are
then
used
to
graphically
solve
equation
(3)
for
Δpmus,
and
depict
the
components
of
work
given
in
equation
(10).
Cg
is
the
compressibility
of
the
gas
in
the
ventilatory
system;
PEEP
is
positive
end-‐expiratory
pressure.
241
Figure
13-‐3:
(a)
Δp
-‐
υL
plot
for
airway-‐body
surface
pressure
difference
versus
ventilatory
system
(lung)
volume
change
(for
data
in
Figure
13-‐2)
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
13-‐3:
(b)
Δp
-‐
υL
plot
for
effective
muscle
pressure
difference
versus
ventilatory
system
(lung)
volume
change
(for
data
in
Figure
13-‐2)
242
Figure
13-‐3:
(c)
Δp
-‐
υL
plot
for
total
deriving
pressure
difference
versus
ventilatory
system
(lung)
volume
change
(for
data
in
Figure
13-‐2)
However,
because
a
simulation
permits
the
calculation
of
variables
that
may
be
unobservable
in
real
life,
we
have
the
effective
muscle
pressure
difference
available
here,
and
can
plot
it
directly,
as
in
Figure
13-‐3(b).
There
is
no
need
to
resort
to
plotting
(pES
–
pBS).
This
makes
visualization
of
the
various
driving
pressure
differences
much
clearer.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
During
quiet
breathing,
both
spontaneous
and
assisted,
the
prime
mover
of
expiratory
flow
is
the
energy
stored
in
the
expanded
elastic
components
of
the
ventilatory
system.
Complementing
this
are
effective
pressure
differences,
if
any,
produced
by
the
respiratory
muscles,
Δpmus,
and
the
ventilator,
(pAO
–
pBS).
These
two
pressure
differences
can
be
positive,
in
which
case
they
retard,
or
act
as
a
brake
on
expiratory
flow.
Or,
they
can
be
negative
and
compress
the
system,
and
assist
expiratory
flow.
Again,
using
Figure
13-‐2,
we
can
construct
a
Δp-‐υL
plot
for
the
expiratory
portion
of
the
breath,
Figure
13-‐4.
243
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
13-‐4:
(a
-‐
c)
Δp
-‐
υL
plot
for
data
in
Figure
13-‐2
with
expiration
included
244
As
the
lung
volume
decreases,
the
expiratory
pathway
on
the
total
pressure
difference-‐volume
plot
continues
counterclockwise
from
the
end-‐inspiration
(Vei
=
Vee+VT)
point
on
the
total
compliance
curve.
It
eventually
meets
the
υL
axis,
at
which
point
Δptot
is
zero
and
both
the
ventilator
and
the
respiratory
muscles
are
passive.
The
ventilatory
system
continues
to
deflate,
driven
by
its
internal
elastic
forces.
However,
before
end-‐expiratory
volume
is
reached,
in
this
example,
the
patient
momentarily
contracts
his
expiratory
muscles
to
increase
the
expiratory
flow.
Then,
he
fully
relaxes
again
just
above
end-‐expiratory
volume.
Vee
⌠
wE(N)=|(pAO
–
pBS)
dυL
+
Δpmus
dυL
VT ⌡
=
wvent
E(N)
+
wmus
E(N)
(11)
These
integrals
represent
the
area
between
the
expiratory
curves
and
the
υL-‐axis.
In
the
upper
portions
of
Figure
4,
just
below
the
end-‐tidal
volume,
the
change
in
υL
is
negative,
i.e.,
the
lung
volume
is
decreasing,
while
the
Δp
is
positive.
Therefore,
the
product
Δp
·∙
dυL
is
negative.
Negative
work
indicates
work
is
being
done
by
the
system
on
its
surroundings.
In
Figure
13-‐4
(a),
the
work
is
done
on
the
ventilator
since
the
(pAO
–
pPL)
component
of
Δptot
is
non-‐zero.
In
Figure
13-‐4
(b),
the
work
is
done
on
the
inspiratory
muscles
as
they
lengthen
while
actively
contracting
before
they
completely
relax
to
Δpmus
=
0.
However,
further
down
the
expired
volume,
in
this
example,
the
expiratory
muscles
are
momentarily
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
activated,
and
Δpmus
becomes
negative,
assisting
expiration.
Since
both
Δpmus
and
υL
are
negative,
s
their
product
is
positive,
and
this
portion
of
the
expiratory
work
is
positive.
Thus,
work
in
this
region
of
volume
change
is
done
on
the
ventilatory
system
by
the
expiratory
muscles
as
they
shorten
while
contracting
during
expiration.
13.1.1.5 Work
of
the
Breathing
Cycle
Figure
13-‐5
shows
an
alternative
way
of
plotting
the
Δp -‐υL
relation
for
a
complete
breathing
cycle
that
might
help
visualize
the
work
involved.
Inspiration
is
plotted
as
in
Figure
13-‐3.
However,
expiration,
i.e.,
negative
changes
in
lung
volume,
is
plotted
upward
from
Vei,
the
end-‐inspiration
point.
Thus,
the
expiratory
curve
is
the
upward
reflection
of
the
expiratory
portion
of
Figure
13-‐5.
245
Figure
13-‐5:
Δp
-‐
υL
curve
for
an
entire
breath
with
expiratory
volume
change
plotted
upward
from
end
inspiration
on
the
υL
-‐axis
All
area
to
the
right
of
the
υL-‐axis
in
the
lower
(inspiratory)
curve
is
positive
work,
done
on
the
system.
In
the
upper
(expiratory)
curve,
the
opposite
holds.
Area
between
Δp
and
the
lung
volume
axis,
to
the
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
right
of
the
lung
volume
axis,
is
negative,
and
represents
work
done
by
the
system.
Area
to
the
left
of
the
υL
-‐axis
is
positive,
and
represents
work
done
on
the
system.
The
same
type
of
plot
can
be
constructed
for
(pAO
–
pPL)
and
Δpmus.
Using
all
three
curves
we
could
examine
the
work
done
by
these
pressure
difference
components
for
the
various
segments
of
the
breath.
Work
can
be
done
on
the
ventilatory
system
by
the
respiratory
muscles,
or
the
ventilator,
or
both,
and
vice
versa.
If
the
work
done
on
or
by
the
respiratory
muscles
is
to
be
evaluated,
then
the
Δpmus -‐υL
curve
is
used.
If
the
work
done
on
or
by
the
ventilator
is
of
interest,
then
the
plot
of
(pAO
–
pPL)
versus
υL
is
required.
If
the
entire
load
represented
by
the
ventilatory
system
is
desired,
then
Δptot -‐υL
is
needed.
When
analyzing
the
work
of
the
breathing
cycle
and
its
subdivisions,
one
must
include
both
the
(positive)
work
done
on
the
system,
and
the
(negative)
work
done
by
the
system.
An
alternative
way
of
viewing
Figure
13-‐4
and
Figure
13-‐5
is
to
consider
the
fate
of
the
work
done
on
the
ventilatory
system
during
inspiration.
For
expiration
to
occur,
i.e.,
υL
to
decrease
from
Vei
toward
Vee,
work
(energy)
is
required.
This
is
supplied
by
the
stretched
elastic
components
of
the
chest
wall
and
lungs.
Work
was
stored
in
them
as
potential
energy
when
the
system
was
expanded
during
246
inspiration
(wel
I
in
Figure
13-‐3).
This
energy
is
used
to
compress
the
ventilatory
system
during
expiration.
Figure
13-‐4
(c)
shows
that
the
potential
(elastic)
energy,
i.e.,
the
area
between
the
Ctot
line
and
the
υL-‐axis,
is
divided
into
two
regions
by
the
expiratory
Δptot-‐υL
curve.
• Area
[1],
between
the
Δptot-‐υL
curve
and
the
υL-‐axis,
represents
the
work
done
on
the
ventilator
and
the
respiratory
muscles
by
the
ventilatory
system’s
elastic
elements
as
they
decrease
in
length.
The
energy
this
represents
is
lost
as
heat
to
the
atmosphere.
• Area
[2],
between
the
Δptot-‐υL
curve
and
the
Ctot
line,
is
work
(energy)
dissipated
(lost)
during
expiration
in
the
passive
resistive
components
of
the
ventilatory
system,
i.e.,
airway
and
tissue
resistances.
This
process
is
the
same
as
occurs
during
inspiration
when
work
(energy),
represented
by
area
[3],
is
dissipated
(lost)
in
the
system’s
resistive
elements.
Over
the
complete
breathing
cycle,
all
of
the
work
invested
in
the
breath
is
ultimately
lost
as
heat.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
247
Figure
13-‐6
(a):
Volume
and
flow
responses
to
the
same
Δptot
forcing
function,
for
ventilatory
systems
with
different
time
constants.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
The
time
constant
of
the
restricted
system,
τR,
is
less
than
that
of
a
normal
system,
τN.
The
obstructed
system’s
time
constant,
τo,
is
larger
than
normal:
τR <
τN
<
τo.
248
Figure
13-‐6
(b):
The
Δp
-‐
υL
for
the
three
cases
Note
that,
in
the
time
allotted,
the
obstructed
system’s
volume
does
not
return
to
the
same
Vee
as
the
other
systems.
Restrictive
diseases,
such
as
chest
wall
paralysis,
pulmonary
fibrosis
or
pneumonia,
typically
may
be
represented
by
a
single
compartment
model
with
a
decreased
compliance
(stiffer
system)
and
approximately
normal
resistance.
Although
the
system
would
be
harder
to
expand,
the
product
of
R
and
C
would
be
smaller
than
normal,
and
the
system
would
be
able
to
empty
faster
than
normal.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Some
obstructive
diseases
may
be
characterized
by
a
single
compartment
model
with
either
an
increased
resistance,
e.g.,
asthma,
tracheal
tumor,
and/or
increased
compliance,
e.g.,
early
emphysema.
In
these
cases,
inspiration
may
be
harder
(increased
R)
or
easier
(increased
C),
and
the
lungs
may
expand
to
a
larger
than
normal
volume
for
the
same
effort
(increased
C).
Expiration,
in
contrast,
because
the
time
constant
is
increased
(increased
R
and/or
increased
C),
can
be
much
longer
than
normal,
requiring
an
extended
expiratory
time
for
the
lungs
to
deflate.
In
many
cases,
they
do
not
reach
the
normal
FRC
before
the
next
breath
begins,
and
gas
is
trapped
in
the
lungs.
From
this,
it
can
be
appreciated
that
the
intrinsic
PEEP
that
accompanies
gas
trapping
is
not
seen
on
a
plot
of
Δptot
versus
υL.
However,
this
residual
pressure
would
appear
on
the
plot
of
(pes–pBS) versus
υ .
L
In
some
disease
processes,
even
for
tidal
volumes
and
breathing
rates
in
the
quiet
range,
the
ventilatory
system,
while
still
acting
as
a
single
compartment,
exhibits
nonlinear
relations
for
the
terms
in
the
right
hand
side
of
equation
(4).
Thus,
Δptot
=
(pAO –
pBS)
+
Δ
pmus
=
f1(υL)
+
f2(ύL)
(13)
249
…where,
f1(υL)
and
f2(ύL)
are
functions
of
lung
volume
change
and
flow.
These
functions
can
exhibit
a
variety
of
nonlinearities,
including
hysteresis,
power
curves,
directional
sensitivities,
and
time
variation.
In
such
cases,
the
time
constant
may
not
be
a
mathematically
appropriate
mechanical
parameter.
However,
in
some
situations,
an
average
time
constant
with
its
concomitant
average
resistance
and
average
compliance,
are
used
–
not
necessarily
correctly
–
to
approximate
the
system
behavior.
13.1.2.2 Non-‐uniform
Lungs
In
some
disease
states,
e.g.,
advanced
COPD,
tissue
loss
and
airway
obstruction
can
be
distributed
in
multiple
locations
throughout
the
lungs.
Consequently,
a
single-‐compartment
model
does
not
describe
the
system’s
behavior
well.
The
minimum
number
of
compartments
that
will
exhibit
the
essential
responses
of
such
systems
is
two.
Figure
13-‐7
shows
a
two-‐compartment
pulmonary
system
within
a
chest
wall
compartment.
It
is
important
to
note
that
the
two
compartments
do
not
necessarily
correspond
to
the
two
lungs.
Instead,
they
represent
the
aggregation,
across
both
lungs,
of
all
regions
that
have
time
constants
sufficiently
similar
to
one
another.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
13-‐7:
Two
compartment
pulmonary
system
within
the
chest
wall
The
parameters
and
variables
are
as
in
Figure
1,
except
that
here
a
distinction
is
made
between
the
resistance,
compliance,
and
volume
of
the
two
compartments,
and
RAW
represents
the
resistance
of
the
larger,
upper
airways
leading
from
the
carina,
(also
called
Rt,
tracheal
resistance).
250
Equation
15
has
the
same
form
as
the
equation
for
an
isolated
two-‐compartment
pulmonary
system
(chest
wall
and
common
airway
not
included)
derived
by
Otis
et
al
(1956)7.
They
showed
that,
in
such
a
relationship,
the
apparent
(dynamic)
compliance
and
the
apparent
resistance
of
the
system
each
decrease
from
their
respective
low
frequency
(static)
values
as
the
frequency
(rate)
of
breathing
increases.
Equation
15)
extends
Otis
et
al’s
work
by
showing
how
changes
in
chest
wall
compliance
and
common
airway
resistance
affects
the
system
response.
Figure
13-‐8
illustrates
the
effect
of
increasing
breath
rate
in
a
two
compartment
ventilatory
system.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
13-‐8:
Δptot
-‐
υL
relation
for
a
two
compartment
ventilatory
system
as
breathing
frequency
is
increased
The
same
amplitude
Δptot
is
applied
at
all
breathing
frequencies,
but
only
during
inspiration.
7
Otis
AB,
McKerrow
CB,
Bartlett
RA,
Mead
J,
McElroy
MB,
Silverstone
NJ
and
Radford
EP
Jr.
Mechanical
Factors
in
Distribution
of
Pulmonary
Ventilation.
J
Appl
Physiol
8:427,
1956.
251
The
apparent
compliance
decreases
so
that,
for
the
same
driving
pressure
difference
–
by
either
the
ventilator
or
respiratory
muscles,
or
both
–
the
tidal
volume
decreases.
The
peak
flow
can
increase.
13.1.2.3 Energetics
The
mechanical
work
of
inspiration
–
i.e.,
the
work
of
deforming
the
lungs
and
chest
wall,
and
of
creating
a
pressure
gradient
through
which
a
volume
of
gas
is
moved
–
is
the
primary
work-‐related
term
used
to
describe
the
status
of
the
ventilatory
system.
However,
it
does
not
necessarily
account
for
all
the
energy
expended
during
inspiration.
Whenever
a
muscle
actively
contracts,
it
uses
energy
–
sometimes
expressed
in
terms
of
oxygen
use,
e.g.,
the
“oxygen
cost”
of
muscle
activity.
This
is
over
and
above
its
basal
metabolism,
which
we
will
disregard.
For
the
same
force
produced,
the
most
energy
is
required
when
the
muscle
shortens
during
contraction.
Less
energy
is
required
when
the
muscle
lengthens
during
contraction.
The
least
is
used
when
the
muscle
does
not
change
length
during
(isometric)
contractions.
When
the
muscle
changes
length
under
load,
work
is
involved.
During
isometric
contraction,
no
work
is
done,
no
matter
how
much
force
is
produced.
Nonetheless,
energy
(oxygen)
is
consumed.
In
a
similar
manner,
a
ventilator,
or
other
mechanical
device,
uses
energy
to
produce
the
pressure
difference
required
to
assist
or
support
breathing.
This
energy,
usually,
electrical
or
pneumatic,
is
above
and
beyond
that
required
to
maintain
the
device
in
an
“on”
or
active
state.
During
inspiration,
the
vast
majority
of
work
done
by
the
respiratory
muscles
and/or
the
ventilator
is
positive,
i.e.,
done
on
the
ventilatory
system.
Depending
on
the
wave
form,
breath
rate,
and
system
mechanical
properties,
a
portion
of
this
positive
work
is
stored
as
potential
energy
in
the
elastic
elements
of
the
tissues,
and
the
remainder
is
dissipated
by
the
resistive
elements,
as
heat,
to
the
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
atmosphere.
Not
all
inspiratory
work
may
be
positive.
In
those
ventilators
that
require
a
drop
in
airway
pressure,
or
flow,
to
initiate
an
assisted
breath,
positive
work
is
performed
by
the
respiratory
muscles,
and
the
same
amount
of
negative
work
is
done
on
the
ventilator,
as
the
intrapulmonary
gas
is
expanded
by
the
respiratory
muscles
at
the
beginning
of
the
breath.
The
increase
in
Δpmus
exceeds
the
decrease
in
(pAO –pBS)
by
the
amount
needed
to
expand
the
lungs
and
chest
wall
sufficiently
to
drop
the
airway
pressure
to
trip
the
trigger.
Thus,
the
Δptot -‐υL
plot
shows
simultaneous
increases
in
lung
volume
and
Δptot
that
follow
the
Ctot
curve
as
the
lung
expands
prior
to
triggering.
The
net
or
total
work,
shown
on
the
Δptot -‐υL
plot,
is
just
that
which
is
required
to
expand
the
chest
wall
and
lungs,
even
though
the
respiratory
muscles
do
additional
work
to
trigger
the
assisted
breath.
This
additional
work
is
shown
on
the
Δpmus -‐υL
and
(pAO –
pBS)-‐υL
plots.
In
some
breathing
patterns,
prior
to
the
start
of
expiration,
there
is
a
pause
during
which
the
lungs
remain
at
end-‐inspiration
for
a
period
of
time.
This
has
been
called
the
inspiratory
hold.
If
this
hold
252
time,
T
is
considered
part
of
inspiration,
then
the
energy
required
to
maintain
the
static
tidal
volume
H,
During
an
isovolumetric
hold,
no
work
is
done
since
the
volume
change
is
zero.
If
the
ventilator
maintains
the
hold,
depending
on
its
design,
energy
may,
or
may
not,
be
used.
In
contrast,
if
the
respiratory
muscles
maintain
the
static
tidal
volume,
then
they
must
do
this
while
contracting
isometrically.
Energy
is
used
by
the
muscles
involved.
The
so-‐called
pressure-‐time
product
(ΔpTH)
has
been
used
by
various
authors
as
an
“index
of
effort,”
or,
interchangeably
with
work
(of
breathing).
The
ΔpTH
is
analogous
to
the
impulse
in
mechanics.
It
is
not
a
work
term
per
se.
However,
in
as
much
as
it
provides
a
basis
for
comparing
ventilators
and
ventilatory
systems,
we
will
use
it
as
a
measure
of
energy,
provided
it
is
scaled
using
an
appropriate
factor
to
provide
it
with
an
appropriate
magnitude
and
units
of
energy.
The
scaling
must
also
account
for
the
different
rates
of
energy
expenditure
by
the
various
components,
i.e.,
the
ventilator
and
the
respiratory
muscles.
Thus,
the
energy
expended
during
inspiration:
1 For
the
ventilator,
is:
Event
I
=
wvent
I
(+)
+
Iw
vent
I
(-‐)I
+
α
vent (p
AO
–
pBS)HI
THI
(16)
2 For
the
respiratory
muscles,
is:
E
mus
I
=
wmus
I
(+)
+
α
mus
Δp
musHI
THI
(17)
…where
α
is
a
factor
that
relates
the
pressure-‐time
product
to
energy
for
the
different
components.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Therefore,
the
total
inspiratory
energy
is:
E
tot
I
=
wtot
I
(+)
+
Iwtot
I
(-‐)I
+
[αvent (pAO –
pBS)
HI +
αmusΔp
musHI] THI
(18)
During
expiration,
the
ventilator
and/or
the
respiratory
muscles
may
be
silent
(zero
work
done),
they
may
retard
exhalation
(negative
work),
or
they
may
aid
exhalation
(positive
work).
(The
pressure-‐time
product
can
be
used
to
estimate
the
energy
required
to
maintain
an
expiratory
hold,
e.g.,
zero
volume
change
at
PEEP.)
253
2 For
the
respiratory
muscles,
is:
E
mus
E
=
Iwmus
E
(-‐)I
+
wmus
E
(+)
(20)
Therefore,
the
total
expiratory
energy
is
E
tot
E
=
Iwvent
E
(-‐)
+
wmus
E
(-‐)I
+
wvent
E
(+)
+
wmus
E
(+)
+
αvent (PEEP) THE
(21)
Many
of
these
terms
are
zero
during
most
breathing
patterns.
Equations
19
–
22
can
be
evaluated
in
a
straightforward
manner
in
a
simulation
in
which
Δpmus
is
available.
Even
though
it
is
more
complicated,
calculation
of
the
various
work
terms
can
be
obtained
by
substituting
equation
3
for
Δpmus.
Again,
a
simulation
can
calculate
and
plot
(pes
–
pBS)
versus
υL
with
a
superimposed
chest
wall
compliance
curve,
if
a
Campbell-‐type
diagram
is
desired,
or
if
intrinsic
PEEP
is
to
be
visualized.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
254
A
more
technical
“translation”
of
the
Equation
of
Motion
for
the
model
(as
described
in
the
previous
section,
Normal
Lungs,
page
236,
and
Non-‐uniform
Lungs,
page
250,
is
shown
below.
Single
Compartment
Dual
Compartment
Figure
13-‐9:
Simulation
Model
Electrical
Analog
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
NOTE
Please
remember
that
in
these
model
configurations
no
distinction
is
made
between
chest
wall
compliance
and
lung
compliance,
instead
they
are
lumped
together.
That
means
that
in
the
simplified
case
of
the
single
compartment
model,
C
represents
total
Compliance
Ctot
(see
also
page
236).
In
the
lung
model
window
and
graphs,
Δpmus
is
simply
called
pmus,
but
it
still
refers
to
the
255
muscle
pressure
difference
as
discussed
in
the
previous
chapter.
In
the
waveform
graphs,
-‐
Δpmus
is
plotted,
showing
a
negative
(downward)
excursion
during
inspiration.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
256
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
13-‐10:
Simulator
Concept
In
addition,
the
system
does
not
feature
a
flow
sensor,
an
advantage
for
long-‐term
accuracy
and
stability
of
volume
measurements.
It,
instead,
calculates
flow
from
the
high
resolution
(14
µL)
volume
data.
The
only
“physical”
parameters
are
volume
and
airway
pressure,
all
other
parameters
are
direct
results
of
model
calculations.
A
two-‐compartment
model
serves
as
the
basis
for
computing
flow,
alveolar
(lung)
pressures
etc.
Performing
the
correct
moves
of
the
simulator
piston,
it
is
thus
possible
to
make
the
system
appear
from
the
outside
indistinguishable
from
a
physical
two-‐compartment
configuration
(think
of
it
as
a
“black
box”).
A
single
compartment
model,
on
the
other
hand,
is
rendered
simply
by
making
both
model
compartments
of
equal
size
and
characteristics.
For
further
details
on
model
parameters
and
special
enhancements,
see
11.1
Advanced
Patient
Modeling,
page
167
ff.
257
One-way
valve
Test lung
Solenoid
valve
2
Mech.
1 3
leak valve 0
Optical limit switches
Brushless DC Motor
w/ encoder
Ventilator
PWM power
Hall signals
Ethernet
COM1
(Host)
Press. cal. Brushless
SIM switch valve Motor motor amplifier
ON Control 5/10 A, 55V
Signal
gr COM2 Differential
(Terminal) press. transducer
-40...110 cm H2O
Barometric
press. transducer
yl
Enc.
signal CAL
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
ON
Helios CPU with O2 sample
Press. transducer
16-bit A/ D converter pump CAL signal
Simulation ON
Fast signal I/ O
paramagnetic Mod.
2kHz motion
controller O2 transducer Systems
inter-
connect
Thermolinear net- board
work thermistor
258
Inspiration
vr3-‐File
Name URC Rin Rout C Effort Rate Pmax Increase Hold Release
Adult Adult_Normal 0.5 6 6 50 Sinusoidal 15 11 30 0 10
Adult_Passive 0.5 6 6 50 Sinusoidal 15 0 30 0 10
Adult_ChBronchitis 0.5 30 30 80 Sinusoidal 18 7 20 0 20
Adult_Emphysema 0.8 6 10 150 Sinusoidal 17 5 10 0 25
Adult_Normal 0.5 6 6 50 Sinusoidal 15 11 30 0 10
Adult_Normal_unassisted 0.5 3 3 80 Sinusoidal 15 7 30 0 10
Adult_Passive 0.5 6 6 50 Sinusoidal 15 0 30 0 10
Adult_ARDS 0.5 11 16 30 Sinusoidal 25 21 27 0 20
Adult_COPD 0.8 21 23 53 Sinusoidal 18 24 35 0 23
Adult_COPD_unassisted 0.8 12 25 66 Sinusoidal 20 25 35 0 23
Adult_Asthma 0.5 30 50 30 Sinusoidal 22 27 20 0 15
Adult_CF 0.5 10 25 45 Sinusoidal 22 17 20 0 20
Pediatric Premature_Neonate 0.2 150 150 0.5 Sinusoidal 45 15.5 23 0 23
Neonate_Normal 0.2 40 40 8 Sinusoidal 32 8 18 0 10
Neonate_Passive 0.2 40 40 8 Sinusoidal 32 0 18 0 10
Neonate_Normal 0.2 40 40 8 Sinusoidal 32 8 18 0 10
Neonate_Passive 0.2 40 40 8 Sinusoidal 32 0 18 0 10
Neonate_BPD 0.2 69 87 2 Sinusoidal 50 30 43 0 20
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Neonate_RDS 0.2 125 125 0.5 Sinusoidal 60 16 25 0 25
Infant_Bronchiolitis 0.2 21 25 12 Sinusoidal 29 5 43 0 20
Toddler_Normal 0.375 25 25 15 Sinusoidal 24 10.5 19 0 12
Toddler_Obstructive 0.9 50 50 15 Sinusoidal 24 20 19 0 12
Toddler_Restrictive 0.225 20 20 7.5 Sinusoidal 24 18 19 0 12
Ped_10kg_Normal 0.4 25 25 10 Sinusoidal 30 12 19 0 12
Ped_10kg_Obstructive 0.6 50 50 10 Sinusoidal 30 18 16 0 13
Ped_10kg_Restrictive 0.15 25 25 5 Sinusoidal 30 19 20 0 13
Pediatric5yo_Asthma 0.4 15 75 20 Sinusoidal 28 20 37 0 15
Pediatric5yo_Normal 0.4 15 15 20 Sinusoidal 20 12.5 25 0 10
Pediatric6-‐12yo_Normal 0.5 20 20 30 Sinusoidal 22 14 30 0 10
Adolescent_Normal 0.5 15 15 40 Sinusoidal 15 16 20 0 20
Kussmaul’s Kussmauls_1 0.5 3 3 80 Trapezoidal 18 12 30 0 10
Kussmauls_2 0.5 3 3 80 Trapezoidal 25 20 30 0 10
Kussmauls_3 0.5 3 3 80 Trapezoidal 40 35 30 0 10
259
vr3-‐File Name URC Rin Rout C Effort Rate Pmax Increase Hold Release
Ampl:
20
Improved_Resistance_Adult_1 1 0.5 Endpoints Endpoints 50 Sinu-‐ 15 11 30 0 10
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
260
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Passive
Passive
(0)
Severe
10
24
35
10
35
15
Adult
COPD
Compliance
Insp/Exp
Patient
Effort
Rise
%
Release
%
Resistance
Rate
Mild/High
50
12/14
30
30
35%
20%
Moderate/Medium
75
21/23
18
20
25%
20%
Severe/Low
100
30/32
10
10
15%
10%
Passive
Passive
(0)
261
Ped
Normal
Compliance
Resistance
Patient
Effort
Rise
%
Release
%
Rate
Mild/High
12
20
40
12
40%
10%
Moderate/Medium
8
30
30
8
30%
10%
Severe/Low
5
40
25
5
25%
10%
Passive
Passive
(0)
Ped
Asthma
Compliance
Insp/Exp
Patient
Effort
Rise
%
Release
Resistance
Rate
%
Mild
15
20/40
60
20
50%
10%
Moderate
10
30/60
45
15
40%
10%
Severe
5
40/80
30
8
30%
10%
Passive
Passive
(0)
Ped
ARDS
Compliance
Resistance
Patient
Effort
Rise
%
Release
%
Rate
Mild/High
10
25
50
15
45%
10%
Moderate/Medium
7
35
40
10
40%
10%
Severe/Low
4
45
25
5
25%
10%
Passive
Passive
(0)
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Ped
CF
Compliance
Resistance
Patient
Effort
Rise
%
Release
Rate
%
Mild/High
20
15
40
12
40%
10%
Moderate/Medium
10
30
30
8
30%
10%
Severe/Low
5
50
20
5
20%
10%
Passive
Passive
(0)
262
Neo
Normal
Compliance
Resistance
Patient
Effort
Rise
%
Release
Rate
%
Mild
8
20
50
6
35%
10%
Moderate
4
40
40
4
30%
10%
Severe
2
60
30
2
25%
10%
Neo
BPD
Compliance
Insp/Exp
Patient
Effort
Rise
%
Release
%
Resistance
Rate
Mild
3
50/70
80
15
45%
20%
Moderate
1.5
60/80
70
10
40%
20%
Severe
0.5
70/90
60
5
35%
20%
Neo
IRDS
Compliance
Resistance
Patient
Effort
Rise
%
Release
%
Rate
Mild
1.5
75
80
50
45%
20%
Moderate
1
100
65
35
40%
20%
Severe
0.5
125
50
20
35%
20%
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
263
a
patient
parameter
to
perhaps
emphasize
a
particular
effect
that
might
be
critical
to
get
across
as
a
significant
learning
objective.
The
patient
responses
are
thus
not
based
on
physiological
modeling,
but
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
rather
expose
the
medical
expertise
of
the
instructor
and
the
authors
of
the
training
modules.
As
far
as
the
progression
of
a
simulation
is
concerned,
the
instructor
is
not
relegated
to
a
passive
role
by
leaving
everything
to
physiological
models
that
work
out
the
patient’s
response.
Rather,
he
or
she
has
an
active
role
as
educator
at
all
times,
with
the
ability
to
make
changes
to
patient
response
“on-‐
the-‐fly.”
264
material
before
being
admitted
to
the
simulation
class
itself.
This
material
is
provided
to
optimize
the
efficacy
of
the
valuable
time
spent
in
the
simulation
lab.
There
is,
with
each
RespiSim®
module,
also
an
Instructor
Scenario
Guide,
a
pdf
worksheet
outlining
the
learning
objectives,
a
case
description,
the
rationale
for
the
separate
stages,
and
details
on
the
settings
for
ventilator
and
patient
model,
similar
to
what
is
found
in
the
software
module
itself
(Instructor
Dashboard).
This
instructor
worksheet
might
also
contain
suggestions
for
debriefing
questions
Included
as
part
of
the
module
package
are
also
files
for
x-‐rays
as
well
as
lung
and
heart
sounds
(where
applicable).
Also
loaded
with
each
module
are
compilations
of
ABG
results
and
lab
results
for
each
stage.
These
file
can
be
played/presented
as
part
of
the
Vital
Signs
Monitor
by
student
request
and
under
instructor
control.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
265
14 SUPPORT
For
a
list
of
answers
to
FAQs,
please
check
IngMar
Medical’s
website.
For
questions
more
directly
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
266
\m.k Troubleshooting
Here
are
a
few
conditions
(with
their
solutions)
that
you
can
easily
identify
and
troubleshoot:
1. Simulator
piston
not
moving:
• At
the
simulator
power
entry
module
(back
of
the
unit),
check
that
power
is
switched
ON
(the
green
switch
must
be
lit).
• Verify
that
the
motor
enable/disable
switch
on
the
front
panel
is
not
in
the
disable
position
(red
light
must
be
OFF
after
the
initial
boot
up
of
the
system,
i.e.,
after
approximately
15-‐20
seconds).
The
enable/disable
switch
must
be
in
the
depressed
position.
• When
the
light
stays
ON
outside
of
the
boot
up
process
(even
while
the
enable/disable
switch
is
in
the
correct,
depressed
position),
it
indicates
a
software
motor
disable.
Possible
reasons:
The
simulator
might
have
disabled
the
motor
because
the
simulation
requested
a
piston
position
that
resulted
in
an
unacceptable
position
error
(tidal
volume
too
large,
considerable
negative
pressure
applied
at
the
ventilator
connection,
acceleration
demands
exceeding
simulator
capabilities,
etc.).
The
software
will
also
not
enable
the
motor
in
case
of
a
failed
boot
procedure.
Solution:
In
order
to
reset
the
ASL
5000
in
this
case,
switch
power
OFF,
wait
a
few
seconds,
then
switch
power
back
ON
again.
2. Host
does
not
sync
up
with
simulator:
• Check
that
power
is
switched
ON
at
the
simulator
power
entry
module
(green
switch
lit).
Power
cycle
the
simulator
(turn
power
OFF,
then
back
ON
again)
and
wait
until
simulator
has
initialized
(approximately
20
seconds
after
power-‐up,
red
light
OFF).
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Then
re-‐try
synchronizing
the
software.
• For
Ethernet
connection,
verify
that
both
the
ASL
5000
and
the
PC
are
connected
to
a
“live”
network
with
DHCP
service
in
place
or
that
the
ASL
5000
has
been
issued
a
fixed
IP
address
(see
15.1,
page
271).
• For
serial
connection
the
USB
cable
must
be
connected
to
the
COM-‐port
labeled
Host
on
the
ASL
5000.
• Also,
confirm
that
the
serial
port
of
the
host
computer
is
not
engaged
by
another
application
(for
example,
PuTTY,
used
for
maintenance
procedures).
• You
may
also
try
disabling
and
re-‐enabling
the
serial
port
of
the
PC
in
the
Windows
Device
Manager.
• Then,
restart
the
ASL
5000
application
(ASL5000_SW3.6.exe).
• Restart
computer,
if
necessary,
to
free
up
a
locked
serial
port.
267
3. Discrepancies
between
traces
for
Lung
Model
and
Piston
in
Run
Time
Home
Flow
and
Volume
charts:
Situations
that
exceed
the
dynamic
capabilities
of
the
simulator
can
be
identified
by
the
fact
that
noticeable
differences
exist
between
the
two
traces
for
“Piston”
and
“Lung
Model”
(in
a
one
compartment
model)
for
flow
and
volume
charts.
4. Charts
do
not
seem
representative
of
the
simulator
behavior
(e.g.
during
HF
ventilation):
The
screen
updating
of
the
chart
in
the
ASL
Run
Time
module
is
considerably
less
detailed
than
the
data
collection
rate
for
the
raw
data
file.
Only
every
10th
to
60th
data
point
is
actually
displayed
(dependent
on
the
choice
of
Chart
Length,
see
page
66).
It
is
intended
for
general
orientation
only
and
not
for
strict
data
analysis.
• Looking
at
the
Display
Data
views
accessed
from
the
Post-‐Run
Analysis
Module
(with
waveform
data
saving
turned
on)
will
show
any
details
that
might
not
have
been
visible
in
the
real-‐time
charts
of
the
ASL
Run
Time
Home
view.
5. Asynchrony
between
calculated
and
“piston”
flows
and
volumes
in
Runtime
charts:
Serial
communication
is
not
able
to
download
the
new
pressure
profile
for
a
breath
in
the
time
it
had
available.
This
might
happen
if
you
switch
from
a
faster
to
a
significantly
slower
breath
rate.
To
prevent
time
constraints
at
higher
bpm,
the
simulator
actually
places
several
breath
profiles
into
one
“breath.”
However,
when
a
longer
profile
needs
to
be
downloaded
for
an
upcoming
slow
rate
while
the
simulator
is
still
operating
at
a
higher
rate,
asynchrony
is
possible.
• Inserting
a
parameter
file
segment
containing
just
one
breath
of
an
in-‐between
rate
can
be
used
to
prevent
this.
This
asynchrony
may
not
occur
when
operating
on
a
network
(Ethernet
connection).
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
6. SmartPump
models
result
in
motor
disable
(red
light
ON):
When
using
SmartPump
mode,
the
pressure
profile
acts
as
a
flow
or
volume
profile,
calibrated
in
L/min
or
L,
respectively.
For
volume
pumps,
numerical
values
have
to
be
very
small
compared
to
regular
models.
Excessive
volumes
will
exceed
the
physical
capabilities
of
the
simulator
and
therefore
might
cause
a
motor
disable.
• Use
values
<
2.1
L
when
operating
with
a
residual
volume
of
0.5
L
(the
default
setting
for
URC).
• Return
to
model
parameters
and/or
conditions
that
are
within
the
performance
range
of
the
simulator
system
(peak
flow,
acceleration)
if
the
piston
was
not
able
to
follow
the
required
movement
fast
enough
and
maintained
a
higher
speed
for
a
longer
time
to
compensate
for
the
effect.
For
additional
topics
on
Troubleshooting,
go
to:
http://www.ingmarmed.com/support/asl-‐5000-‐training-‐support/asl-‐5000-‐troubleshooting/
268
15 MAINTENANCE
When
inquiring
about
maintenance,
always
have
the
serial
number
of
your
device
available.
Additional
reference
information
can
be
found
on
the
label
on
the
bottom
of
the
instrument
a
copy
of
which
is
included
also
in
the
product
binder
supplied
which
each
instrument.
Figure
15-‐1:
ASL
5000
Component
Serial
Numbers
CAUTION!
The
ASL
5000
does
not
contain
user-‐serviceable
components
or
parts.
Unauthorized
opening
of
the
device
will
void
the
warranty.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Right-‐click
anywhere
on
the
Welcome
window
(see
Figure
5-‐5,
page
25)
and
the
Maintenance
Menu
opens.
269
Figure
15-‐2:
Maintenance
Menu
Click
on
for
information
that
is
relevant
for
determining
the
need
for
calibration
as
well
as
maintenance
of
the
piston
seals.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
15-‐3:
Odometer
Readings
270
1. Right-‐click
anywhere
on
the
Welcome
window
(with
the
switch
in
Full
System
Mode
to
access
the
Maintenance
Menu
(see
Figure
15-‐2).
2. Click
.
The
IP
Configuration
window
appears.
Figure
15-‐4:
Configuration
for
Fixed
IP
Address
3. Select
Use
IP
and
enter
the
desired
IP
address
into
the
fields.
Verify
the
IP
address
entered
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
carefully
and
click
.
After
this
step,
the
software
will
proceed
to
generate
a
condition
of
firmware
mismatch,
which
gets
you
to
the
prompt
of
firmware
update
as
described
in
Firmware
Upgrade
on
page
272).
When
being
asked
to
restart
the
software,
you
should
save
the
User
Settings
before
exiting
because
it
will
save
the
new,
fixed
IP
address
as
the
new
default
for
communicating
with
the
ASL
5000.
271
Figure
15-‐5:
Firmware
Upload
Dialog
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
• To
perform
the
firmware
upgrade,
select
Upload
new
version
from
host.
A
new
pop-‐up
window
gives
you
the
opportunity
to
verify
the
upgrade
about
to
be
performed.
NOTE
When
connected
via
RS-‐232
(serial
connection),
the
update
process
will
take
longer
than
one
minute.
It
is
therefore
recommended
to
use
Ethernet
connectivity
when
attempting
a
firmware
upgrade.
272
Figure
15-‐6:
Firmware
Upgrade
Verification
• If
satisfied
with
the
upgrade
information,
click
.
User’s Manual ASL 5000, SW 3 .6, Rev.1, © IngMar M edical, L td. 2016
Figure
15-‐7:
Firmware
Upload
Message
• Click
and
wait
for
the
message
indicating
that
the
upload
is
complete.
• Acknowledge
and
restart
the
ASL
5000
for
the
new
firmware
to
take
effect.
273
Maintenance reminder messages for both calibration and seal replacement at software startup are
implemented
in
the
software.
They
can
be
suppressed
if
not
desired.
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
For
details
about
available
service
subscriptions
or
extended
warranty
plans,
please
contact
IngMar
Medical
Customer
Care
at
1
(800)
683-‐9910,
or
+1
(412)
441-‐8228
ext.
107
or
e-‐mail
to
customercare@ingmarmed.com
274
16 TECHNICAL DATA
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
up
to
10
mL
greater
of
±
15%
of
reading
or
1.5
mL
up
to
100
mL
greater
of
±
3%
of
reading
or
3
mL
up
to
1000
mL
greater
of
±
2%
of
reading
or
20
mL
FRC
setting
100
...1500
mL
Deadspace
200
mL
Volumes
(Preemie
Add-‐On
Cylinder)
Total
0.4
L
Tidal
0.5
to
200
mL
Volume
uncertainty
up
to
10
mL
greater
of
±
2%
of
reading
or
0.2
mL
up
to
100
mL
greater
of
±
1%
of
reading
or
1
mL
FRC
setting
100
...150
mL
275
Deadspace
25
mL
Frequencies
Spontaneous
breath
rate
0
to
150/min
(infant
Vt)
Small
signal
bandwidth
better
than
15
Hz
(10
cm
passive
response
to
HF
ventilation)
3
Flows
Peak
flow
270
L/min
for
units
with
4mm,
180
L/min
for
units
with
2.5
mm
pitch
ball
screws
Flow
rise
t90flow
<
50
ms
Low
flow
<
1
L/min
Uncertainty
±
2%
of
reading
Passive
Model8
Resistance
5
to
500
cmH2O/L/s
linear
and
parabolic
Uncertainty
±
10
of
set
value
Compliance
1
or
2
compartment,
0.5
to
250
mL/cmH2O
overall
Uncertainty
±
5%
of
set
value
Leak
on
SBLVM
(avail.
option),
approx.
4,
9,
15
L/min
at
20
cmH2O
leak
orifices
exchangeable
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Active
Model
Chestwall
pressure
profiles
Pressure
trigger,
flow
trigger,
sinusoidal,
trapezoidal,
user-‐file
defined
8
The
ASL
5000
complies
with
the
requirements
for
test
lungs
of
ISO
80601-‐2-‐12
(2011),
“Particular
requirements
for
basic
safety
and
essential
performance
of
critical
care
ventilators”.
276
Pressure
Measurement
Airway
uncertainty
<
than
1%
fso
Barometric
uncertainty
<
1%
(1
kPa)
Gas
Temperature
uncertainty
<0.5°C
(20
-‐
45°C)
Servo
System
update
rate
2048
Hz
Fast
Oxygen
Module
Part
no.
31
00
300
(FOM
Option)
Principle
Paramagnetic
(partial
pressure
measurement)
O2
Meas.
Range
0
to
100%
O2
O2
uncertainty
±0.5%
O2
Response
time
<350
msec
(t90,
21
to
100%
O2)
Cylinder
Temperature
Part
no.
31
00
400
Controller
(CTC
Option)
Principle
PID-‐controlled
foil
heater
on
cylinder
circumference
Wall
temperature
setting
ambient
+5
ºC
to
45
ºC
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Auxiliary
Part
no.
31
00
600
Gas
Exchange
Cylinder
(AGEC
Option)
Principle
Bag-‐in-‐bottle
external
cylinder
Volume
approximately
3.0
L
(accommodates
bags/bellows
up
to
4.5
inches
inflated
diameter)
Chest
Rise
Module
Option
Part
no.
31
00
730
Principle
Pneumatic
controller
for
manikin
simulator
chest
rise
“pillow“
Compatibility
designed
for
use
with
Laerdal
SimMan (Classic
and
3G)
TM
277
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
Figure
16-‐1:
VIK
Configuration
278
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Materials
Used
Inside
the
Simulator
Cylinder
anodized
aluminum,
silicone
sealant
Piston
plate
aluminum,
closed
cell
foam
pad
Piston
seal
Teflon®,
Nylon®,
rubber
Temperature
sensor
Nylon,
brass
279
Host
Software
LabVIEW
modules
for:
modeling
simulation
data
analysis
LabVIEW
utilities
for
breath
profile
resampling
interface
module
for
remote
control
via
external
LabVIEW
software
TCP/IP
Breath
Parameter
Client
TCP/IP
Waveform
Client
\s.s Environmental
Specifications
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
280
17 INDEX
A
Active
expiration
....................................................................
180
fixed
IP
address
.................................................................
269
AGEC
.......................................................................................
209
parameter
highlighting
.....................................................
139
preference
set
...................................................................
123
AICP(Advanced
Interactive
Control
Panel)
.............................
110
relative
path
......................................................................
159
Analysis
.....................................................................................
65
RespiScope
........................................................................
142
menu
...................................................................................
72
TCP
Breath
Client
..............................................................
195
Post-‐Run
..............................................................................
71
TCP
Broadcast
...................................................................
196
real
time
..............................................................................
68
VIK,
hard-‐wired
.................................................................
221
Ventilator
Performance
......................................................
85
VIK,
Ventilator
Adapters
...................................................
276
Analysis
Parameters
Connection
default
...............................................................................
164
electrical
......................................................................
20,
153
Anesthetics
...............................................................................
14
Ethernet
..............................................................................
21
Auxiliary
Channel
serial
(USB)
........................................................................
155
resampling
........................................................................
189
WiFi
.....................................................................................
21
Auxiliary
Gas
Exchange
Cylinder
.............................................
209
Connector,
specification
for
analog
channel
..................
197,
200
Converter
B
serial-‐to-‐USB
.....................................................................
155
CTC
(Cylinder
Temperature
Controller)
..................................
203
Backing
off
electrical
specs.
.................................................................
277
expiratory
..........................................................................
180
Curriculum
teaching
modules
..................................................
40
inspiratory
.................................................................
179,
254
Barometric
pressure
...........................................................
65,
67
Breath
detection
................................................................
68,
97
D
settings
................................................................................
70
Damage
....................................................................................
15
during
shipment
....................................................................
3
C
excessive
voltageon
analog
inputs
....................................
182
Preemie
cylinder
threads
..................................................
208
Calibration
..............................................................................
272
Preemie
piston
seal
...........................................................
208
intervals
............................................................................
272
Data
Chart
Length
.............................................................................
65
raw
................................................................................
69,
75
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Chest
wall
rwb-‐files
............................................................................
187
compliance
................................................................
169,
236
Data
file
types
..........................................................................
98
Clinical
simulations
Data
files
................................................................................
187
multi-‐stage
........................................................................
262
Definitions
Closed
Loop
of
terms
used
......................................................................
12
CO2
Tab
...............................................................................
54
of
time
marks
......................................................................
87
MV
Tab
................................................................................
53
of
tokens
...........................................................................
160
slider
...................................................................................
50
parameter
...........................................................................
87
Vt
Tab
..................................................................................
52
DHCP
Compensations
....................................................
59,
70,
170,
172
IP
address
from
.................................................................
218
Compliance
service
...............................................................................
153
chest
wall
............................................................................
36
Disease
state
......................................................................
35,
37
circuit
..................................................................................
70
from
QuickChoice/Interactive
...........................................
107
compounded
.....................................................................
169
RespiSim
settings
..............................................................
113
lung
.....................................................................................
36
Disease
states
.........................................................................
254
Non-‐linear
...................................................................
59,
171
patient
.................................................................................
70
ventilator
...........................................................................
165
Configuration
analog
output
....................................................................
198
Ethernet
..............................................................................
22
281
E
H
Electrical
supply
..........................................................
15,
20,
267
HF
ventilation
.........................................................................
266
Equation
of
Motion
................................................................
253
response
to
.......................................................................
274
display
window
...................................................................
33
Error
I
mean
squared,
inspiratory
..................................................
92
mean
squared,
expiratory
...................................................
90
Identification
position
.............................................................................
265
network
IP
address
...........................................................
195
of
breaths
............................................................................
71
Errors
common
............................................................................
265
Installation
of
VIK
(Ventilator
Interface
Kit)
.........................................
214
Ethernet
Preemie
cylinder
...............................................................
206
wired
setup
.........................................................................
21
software
upgrade
..............................................................
270
Ethernet
port
............................................................................
21
software,
manual
..............................................................
270
Event
Graph
............................................................................
120
Instructor
Dashboard
.............................................................
112
markings
............................................................................
123
Change
Event
view
............................................................
115
Event
markers
........................................................................
121
Initial
Settings
sub-‐tab
......................................................
112
Excel
.......................................................................................
188
Instructor
Scenario
Guide
......................................................
263
Exit
Instructor
settings
software
..............................................................................
45
enabling
............................................................................
115
Virtual
Ventilator
..............................................................
105
Intended
Use
............................................................................
13
Explosion
hazard
......................................................................
14
Interactive
Control
Panel
(ICP)
.................................................
47
IP
address
F
fixed
..................................................................................
269
from
DHCP
........................................................................
218
Fast
Oxygen
Measurement
(FOM)
.........................................
204
Features
lung
model,
advanced
.......................................................
166
L
of
the
standard
user
environment
......................................
41
Limitation
of
Liability
.................................................................
4
software
..............................................................................
18
Lung
Model
system
.................................................................................
18
parameters
in
ICP
................................................................
49
Firmware
single
compartment
....................................................
58,
166
adjustments
for
Preemie
cylinder
.....................................
207
two
compartment
...............................................................
58
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
G
Gain
factor
data
resampling
................................................................
191
in
User
Settings,
default
analysis
parameters
...................
164
multi-‐parameter
graph
.......................................................
78
pressure/flow
input
resampling
........................................
194
raw
data
preview
................................................................
75
setting
for
analog
Pmus
input
...........................................
182
Gas
temperature
......................................................................
67
282
M
Maintenance
..........................................................................
272
Patient
model
Measurement
advanced
interactive
.........................................................
110
gas
temperature,
uncertainty
...........................................
275
Patient
modeling
......................................................................
35
oxygen
...............................................................................
204
advanced
...........................................................................
166
pressure,
uncertainty
........................................................
275
Patient
rooms
...........................................................................
14
pressure,
with
Preemie
cylinder
.......................................
208
temperature,
with
Preemie
cylinder
.................................
206
Pausing
a
simulation
................................................................
45
volume
..............................................................................
255
Performance
Measurement,
fast
oxygen
......................................................
18
thresholds
...........................................................................
39
Model
Performance
Analysis
...............................................................
85
lung
.....................................................................................
58
Performance
verification,
ventilator
........................................
13
lung,
interactive
..................................................................
49
Playback
mode
.......................................................................
120
lung,
single
compartment
...................................................
58
Port
lung,
two
compartment
......................................................
58
Ethernet
..............................................................................
21
patient
effort
...............................................................
59,
193
USB
......................................................................................
22
Model,
limitations
of
..............................................................
254
Post-‐Run
Analysis
.....................................................................
71
MV
Precautions
..............................................................................
15
closed
loop
..........................................................................
53
Preferences
desired
value
.......................................................................
53
RespiSim
............................................................................
122
tab
.......................................................................................
53
Pressure
feedback
in
control
loop
...................................................................
255
O
off
for
pump
models
.........................................................
193
Odometer
readings
................................................................
268
Pressure
filter
...........................................................................
69
Options
Pressure
trigger
................................................................
61,
177
hardware
.............................................................................
18
Procedures,
ventilator
test
or
calibration
................................
13
software
..............................................................................
18
Product
Warranty
.......................................................................
3
Oscillations,
high
frequency
.....................................................
71
PuTTY
..............................................................................
201,
207
Over
voltage
protection
.................................................
197,
200
Overview
R
functional
............................................................................
16
scenario
.............................................................................
136
Ramps
pressure
profile
...................................................................
61
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
schematic
..........................................................................
256
software
..............................................................................
17
Raw
Data
Preview
....................................................................
75
system
.................................................................................
16
Real
time
analysis
.....................................................................
68
TAI
(Test
Automation
Interface)
.......................................
202
Resampling
WebClinical
.......................................................................
227
pressure/flow
profile
........................................................
193
Oxygen,
use
with
......................................................................
15
Resistance
linear
.................................................................................
168
P
mixed
................................................................................
168
ventilator
...........................................................................
165
Parameter
definitions
........................................................
83,
87
Resistor
Parameters
parabolic
...........................................................................
168
auxiliary
analog
input
..........................................................
67
tracheal
.............................................................................
168
numeric
.............................................................................
120
Resistors
Patents
.......................................................................................
4
independent
(in/out)
........................................................
169
Patient
......................................................................................
12
lung
...................................................................................
169
Patient
charting,
training
.......................................................
224
RespiSim
.................................................................................
106
Patient
effort
model
...............................................................
192
Response,
neural,
to
ventilation
............................................
254
advanced
features
............................................................
177
Review
&
Exit
(WebClinical)
...................................................
230
sinusoidal
..........................................................................
177
Run
Time
Home
........................................................................
41
Patient
effort
profile
user-‐defined
......................................................................
193
283
S
Temperature
Safety
considerations
...............................................................
12
cylinder
wall
......................................................................
203
Sampling
rate,
waveform
data
...............................................
170
gas
.......................................................................................
67
SBLVM
(Simulator
Bypass
and
Leak
Valve
Module)
...............
211
Terminal
program,
using
........................................................
207
Scenario
Concept
Presentation
..............................................
262
Test
Automation
Interface
(TAI)
.............................................
201
Screen
chart,
updates
............................................................
266
Test
lung,
with
SBLVM
............................................................
211
Serial-‐to-‐USB
converter
..........................................................
155
Theory
of
operation
...............................................................
234
Simulator
Bypass
and
Leak
Valve
Module
........................
18,
211
Time-‐varying
parameters
.......................................................
172
Sinusoidal
patient
effort
...........................................................
61
Trademarks
................................................................................
4
SmartPump
Trapezoidal
patient
effort
........................................................
61
mode
...................................................................................
14
Trends
models
................................................................................
36
default
analysis
parameters
..............................................
164
SmartPump
mode
....................................................................
18
multi-‐parameter
view
.........................................................
81
Software
RespiSim
Preferences
........................................................
124
adjustments
for
Preemie
cylinder
.....................................
207
Trigger
response
time
(time
to
trigger)
....................................
96
Software
License
Agreements
....................................................
5
Troubleshooting
.....................................................................
265
Specifications
ASL
5000
............................................................................
273
U
electrical
............................................................................
277
environmental
...................................................................
278
Update
physical
.............................................................................
277
ASL
5000
software
............................................................
270
software
............................................................................
278
firmware
...........................................................................
270
Spills
.........................................................................................
15
VIK
software
......................................................................
214
Starting
USB
cable
..........................................................................
22,
265
ASL
5000
..............................................................................
23
USB
port
...................................................................................
22
simulation
...........................................................................
28
User-‐defined
Switch,
emergency
OFF
............................................................
23
patient
effort
profile
.........................................................
193
Switch,
motor
enable/disable
................................................
265
Symmetrical
flow
profiles,
SmartPump
mode
........................
183
V
Synchronization,
problems
with
.............................................
265
Ventilator
.................................................................................
13
Ventilator
Performance
Analysis
..............................................
85
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
T
Volume
corrections
Target
conditions
...........................................................................
73
override
...............................................................................
74
in
Post-‐Run
Analysis
............................................................
73
presssure
.............................................................................
74
in
Real
Time
Analysis
...........................................................
68
Vt
set
value
.........................................................................
52
Volume
threshold
TDMS
file
................................................................................
190
breath
start
.........................................................................
70
default
.................................................................................
87
Technical
data
........................................................................
273
expiratory
start
...................................................................
70
Z
Zoom
tool
........................................
75,
77,
79,
80,
81,
82,
85,
86
284
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
6-‐5:
Script
Editor,
Manual
Scripting
View
.......................................................................................................................
38
Figure
7-‐1:
The
Run
Time
Home
Tab
.........................................................................................................................................
42
Figure
7-‐2:
Graph
Area
and
Options
..........................................................................................................................................
43
Figure
7-‐3:
Interactive
Control,
Debrief,
Virtual
Vent,
Start/Stop
Sim.,
and
Set
Pause
.............................................................
44
Figure
7-‐4:
Fill
Bar,
Create
Report,
and
Exit
Software
...............................................................................................................
46
Figure
7-‐5:
Interactive
Control
Panel
.........................................................................................................................................
48
Figure
7-‐6:
Lung
Model
Parameters
tab
....................................................................................................................................
49
Figure
7-‐7:
Spontaneous
Breathing
Parameters
Tab
................................................................................................................
50
Figure
7-‐8:
Trends
Tab
...............................................................................................................................................................
51
Figure
7-‐9:
Closed
Loop
Vt
.........................................................................................................................................................
52
Figure
7-‐10:
Closed
Loop
MV
.....................................................................................................................................................
53
Figure
7-‐11:
Closed
Loop
CO2
....................................................................................................................................................
54
Figure
7-‐12:
Scenario
Scripts
Library
.........................................................................................................................................
56
Figure
7-‐13:
Manual
Scripting
...................................................................................................................................................
57
Figure
7-‐14:
Simulation
Editor,
Step
1
.......................................................................................................................................
57
Figure
7-‐15:
Lung
Model
Editing,
Step
2
....................................................................................................................................
58
285
Figure
8-‐4:
Virtual
ventilator
Example
-‐
Inspiratory
Time
Mismatch
......................................................................................
105
Figure
8-‐5:
Virtual
ventilator
Example
-‐
Inspiratory
Time
Mismatch
Resolved
.......................................................................
106
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
286
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
9-‐43:
Instructor
Dashboard
Real
Time
Parameters
......................................................................................................
149
Figure
9-‐44:
RespiSim®
Module
File
Directories
......................................................................................................................
150
Figure
9-‐45:
Support
File
Notification
.....................................................................................................................................
151
Figure
10-‐1:
Welcome
Window
-‐
User
Settings
Selection
........................................................................................................
152
Figure
10-‐2:
Help/Customize
-‐
User
Settings
...........................................................................................................................
153
Figure
10-‐3:
ASL
User
Settings
Window
..................................................................................................................................
153
Figure
10-‐4:
ASL
User
Settings
Files
in
ASL
User
Settings
Window
..........................................................................................
154
Figure
10-‐5:
Connection
Settings
-‐
Fixed
IP
Address
................................................................................................................
155
Figure
10-‐6:
Connection
Settings
-‐
COM1
................................................................................................................................
156
Figure
10-‐7:
Output
Data
Settings
...........................................................................................................................................
157
Figure
10-‐8:
Appearance/General
Settings
.............................................................................................................................
158
Figure
10-‐9:
Help/Customize
–
Graph
Colors
..........................................................................................................................
159
Figure
10-‐10:
Customize
Graph
Colors
....................................................................................................................................
159
Figure
10-‐11:
Script
Editor
Preferences
...................................................................................................................................
160
Figure
10-‐12:
Relative
Path
Configuration
Tool
......................................................................................................................
161
Figure
10-‐13:
Add/Edit
Relative
Path
......................................................................................................................................
162
287
Figure
11-‐21:
File
Conversion
Selection
...................................................................................................................................
188
Figure
11-‐22:
AUX
Channel
Resampling
..................................................................................................................................
190
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
288
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
Figure
13-‐1:
A
one-‐compartment
ventilatory
system
in
which...
............................................................................................
237
Figure
13-‐2:
Normal
ventilatory
system
responses
during
assisted
inspiration
.....................................................................
240
Figure
13-‐3:
(a)
Δp
-‐
υL
plot
for
airway-‐body
surface
press.
diff.
versus..(lung)
volume
change
(for
data
in
Figure
13-‐2)
..
Error!
Bookmark
not
defined.
Figure
13-‐4:
(a
-‐
c)
Δp
-‐
υL
plot
for
data
in
Figure
13-‐2
with
expiration
included
..........................
Error!
Bookmark
not
defined.
Figure
13-‐5:
Δp
-‐
υL
curve
for
an
entire
breath
with
expiratory
volume
change
...........................
Error!
Bookmark
not
defined.
Figure
13-‐6
(a):
Vol.
and
flow
responses
to
the
same
Δptot
forcing
function,
for
vent.
systems
with
diff.
time
constants.
.
Error!
Bookmark
not
defined.
Figure
13-‐7:
Two
compartment
pulmonary
system
within
the
chest
wall
....................................
Error!
Bookmark
not
defined.
Figure
13-‐8:
Δptot
-‐
υL
relation
for
a
two
compartment
ventilatory
system
as
breathing
frequency
is
increased
..............
Error!
Bookmark
not
defined.
Figure
13-‐9:
Simulation
Model
Electrical
Analog
....................................................................................................................
255
Figure
13-‐10:
Simulator
Concept
.............................................................................................................................................
257
Figure
13-‐11:
ASL
5000
Schematic
Overview
..........................................................................................................................
258
Figure
15-‐1:
ASL
5000
Component
Serial
Numbers
.................................................................................................................
269
Figure
15-‐2:
Maintenance
Menu
.............................................................................................................................................
270
Figure
15-‐3:
Odometer
Readings
.............................................................................................................................................
270
289
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
290
This
page
intentionally
left
blank
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.1,
©
IngMar
M edical,
L td.
2016
291
User’s
Manual
ASL
5000,
SW
3 .6,
Rev.
1,
©
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
2016
80
31
760
IngMar
Medical,
Ltd.
ISO9001:
2008
certified
www.ingmarmed.com
292